Home

RD-MV100 Series Recorder User Manual

1. DC voltage standard Input terminals DC volt and TC inputs 13 3 13 3 Calibration Temperature measurement using the RTD example for the RD MV112 Oo a O o Sees SPANS SSSISS8 S893 5 A SESS Oe SSess The resistance of three lead wires o lbo must be equal A lt oO i ao ao OO0000 Decade resistance box Input terminals RTD inputs Temperature measurement using the TC example for the RD MV112 Thermocouple wires Copper wires or TC extension wires Thermocouple wires ao Q DC voltage standard Bathe in crushed ice to keep at 0 C Input terminals R
2. 187 7 7 39 m 52 2 05 180 7 09 e qT 14 18 Appendix Appendix 1 Setting Mode Initial settings are thick framed Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Range 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV Other parameters 6V 20V Upper lower limits of span TC R S B K E J T N w L U RTD PT JPT Other parameters Upper lower limits of span Scale Volt 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2V Other parameters 6V 20V Upper lower limits of span Upper lower limits of scale TC R S B K E J T N w L U RTD PT JPT DI Level Cont Unit Character string Delta Volt 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2V Other parameters 6V 20V Upper lower limits of span TC R S B K E J T N w L U RTD PT JPT DI Level Cont Ref CH Up to model types DI Level Cont Other parameters Upper lower limits of span Sqrt 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2V Other parameters A Upper lower limits of span 6V 20V Upper lower limits of scale Unit Character string Skip Alarm On Off On Off Type H L h l R f T t Value Numerical value Relay On Off On Off Number 101 to 106 Up to model types Tag Tag Character
3. OC Od Option terminal 0 0 2 Q A E im Terminal arrangement only the position of the FAIL Memory end output terminals is indicated When the relay is not energized NC is closed and NO is open C is the common terminal FAIL MEMORY 3 Replace the terminal cover and fasten it with screws Note The option terminal block itself can be removed by loosening the two screws at the top left and bottom right of the terminal block This makes wiring work easier To prevent bad contacts make sure to securely tighten the screws after wiring FAIL output is a de energize relay and the Memory End output is an energize relay 2 9 Jep109eyY oy Husn a10jog e 2 5 FAIL Memory End Wiring F1 Option Contact Specifications Item Specification Output type Relay transfer contact Output capacity 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3A 250 VDC 0 1 A resistive load Dielectric strength 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute between output terminals and earth ground terminal For details related to the FAIL Memory End output see section 1 8 2 10 2 6 Remote Control Wiring R1 Option A WARNING To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF Wiring Procedure 1 Turn OFF the recorder and remove the cover for the option terminal 2 Connect the remote cont
4. Soft key Settings in the Setting Mode Title Item 5 3 Zone 7 9 Zone upper and lower limits Graph 7 10 Number of scale divisions for the trend and bar graph Bar graph base position Specify the the scale display positon for trends Partial 7 11 Turn On Off partial expansion display Position and boundary for the partial expansion display 5 4 View 7 13 Trend display direction Bar graph display direction Background color white or black Trend line width Trip line width Grid for the trend display Group display switching interva Scroll time LCD 7 14 LCD brightness Turn On Off the LCD backlight saver Transition time for the LCD backlight saver and conditions that restore the backlight 5 5 Math Color 7 8 Computation channel display color 5 6 Zone 7 9 Zone upper and lower limits for the computation channels Graph 7 10 Number of scale divisions for the trend and bar graph displays for the computation channels Bar graph base positions for the computation channels Specify the the scale display positon for trends for the computation channels Partial 7 11 Turn On Off partial expansion display for the computation channels Position and boundary for the partial expansion display for the computation channels 6 File 8 9 Header string to be written to file Name of directory to which data are to be saved Range of data to be saved during manual save Daylight savings time 10 12 Daylight savings time
5. 3 3 3 2 Turning ON OFF the Power Switch This section describes the procedures to turn ON OFF the power switch Procedure 1 Check the following points before turning ON the power switch The power cord wires are connected correctly to the recorder The recorder is connected to the correct power supply See section 14 7 The proper fuse is set CAUTION If the input wires are connected in parallel with another instrument avoid turning ON OFF the recorder or the other instrument when either one is in operation This may affect the reading 2 Turn the power switch ON After performing a self diagnosis for a few seconds a screen in the operation mode appears Note If nothing is displayed when the power switch is turned ON turn OFF the power switch and check the points listed in step 1 After checking the points turn ON the power switch again If the unit still does not work it is probably malfunctioning Contact Omega for repairs If an error message is displayed on the screen take measures according to the description in chapter 12 Troubleshooting Turn ON the power switch let the RD MV100 warm up for at least 30 minutes and then start the measurements 3 3 Inserting Removing the External Storage Medium Procedure This section describes the procedures to insert and remove the external storage medium Three types of media can be used depending on the specification e
6. A g y V 3 When using the user ID a window appears for you to enter the user ID Enter the user ID and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 User name user1 User ID E ABCDEFGHIJ KLHNOPQRST 4 A window appears for you to enter the password Enter the password and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 User name userl Password Eo ABCDEFGHIS KLHNOPORST 10 4 10 3 Using the Key Login Logout Function Explanation The user name is displayed in the status display section User name a Ea H Los osaa Geor e Logging out 1 Press the FUNC key The Logout soft key is displayed 2 Press the Logout soft key The user name shown in the status display section disappears eS Auto logout This function is available in the operation mode If there is no key operation for ten minutes the user is automatically logged out The auto logout function can be activated in the basic setting mode Power up operation Power ON i Log out status Logout operation Login operation or FUNC key Auto logout Password User ID Operation mode When the basic setting mode is terminated When the basic setting mode is terminated and the mode returns to the operation mode the recorder is in the logged out co
7. 5 min 6 min 10 min 12 min 15 min 20 min 30 min fr sd 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h 24h Relative Numerical value Ref time Numerical value Initial setting is 0 00 Reset Action Option Report set Day Day Week Report Day Month Date Numerical value Date of the week SUN MON TUE WEN THU FRI SAT Time hour Numerical value App 5 xipueddy z Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Option Report CH Roi R02 R03 R04 feport R05 R06 R07 ROB R09 R10 R11 R12 On Off on fof Channel Up to model types Sum scale off min h day Communication IP address Numerical value vem Subnet mask Default gateway DNS On Off On Server search order Primary Numerical value Secondary Host name Character string Domain name Domain suffix search order Primary Character string Secondary Communication Baud rate 4800 Serial Data length Parity None RS 232 Handshaking Off Off XON XON XON RS cs RS RS 422A Address 3 4 485 7 8 11 12 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Protocol Memory out FTP transfer Disp amp Event data file Report FT
8. 301 Too many number of commands delimited with 302 This command has not been defined 303 Data request command can not be enumerated with sub delimiter 350 Command is not permitted to the current user level 351 This command cannot be specified in the current mode 352 The option is not installed 353 This command cannot be specified in the current setting 354 This command is not available during sampling or calculating 12 5 Bunooyseaqnos D 12 1 A List of Messages Memory Access Errors during Setting and Basic Setting Modes and Output Communication Command Execution An English error message is returned via the communication interface It is not displayed on the screen Code Message 360 Output interface must be chosen from Ethernet or RS by using XO command 361 The memory data is not saved for the communication output 362 There are no data to send NEXT or RESEND 363 All data have already been transferred Maintenance and Test Communication Command Errors An English error message is returned via the communication interface It is not displayed on the screen Code Message 390 Command error 391 Delimiter error 392 Parameter error 393 No permission 394 No such connection 395 Use quit to close this connection 396 Failed to disconnect 397 No TCP control block e Other C
9. Display direction Base position The displayed color of the channels are common with the trend display Section 7 8 Displayed color The number of divisions of the scale can be set to a value in the range 4 to 12 div Section 7 10 common with the trend display Scale display 1 3 Display Function Overview Screen Alarm Summary A list of measured computed values and alarm conditions of all measurement computation channels is displayed You can move the cursor to select a channel and display the trend or bar graph of the group containing the selected channel For the procedure used to display the overview see section 4 4 Channel Tag Cursor The area corresponding toa Alarm type channel on which an alarm is occurring is displayed in red The area corresponding to a channel on which an alarm is not occurring is displayed in green Unit Measured computed value Updating of the numerical display Measured and computed value are updated every second However when the scan interval on the RD MV106 RD MV112 is 2 s the display update rate is also 2 s A list of the most recent alarms can be displayed By scrolling the screen using a key up to 120 incidents can be displayed By selecting an alarm from the list using arrow keys the historical trend of the display data or event data containing the alarm can be recalled For a description on the historical trend displ
10. Press Clear data soft key to display a confirmation window Selecting Yes and pressing the DISP ENTER key clears the data from the internal memory N 9 8 Initializing Setup Data Procedure Initializes the setup data in the internal memory Also Clears display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data option report data option and logs from the internal memory this is the same function as clearing data in the setting mode explained in section9 7 The recorder returns to the operation mode For the initial settings of the setup data see Appendix 1 e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Press Press Press the soft key Next 1 3 Press 8 soft key to display the Save Load Initialize menu screen for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Press 5 soft key to display the Initialize screen Initialize Kind Initialize contents Clearl Setup settings Settings Neasure amp Math data Clear2 Settings Measure amp Math data Clear3 MNeasure amp Math data 1 Select the type of initialization to set in the Type box To cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Initialize menu press the Clear 1 Clears the settings in the basic setting mode settings in the setting mode and the internal memory Clear 2 Clears the settings in the setting mode and the internal memory Clear 3 Clears the internal memory 2 Pre
11. Set mode a Hath setl Expression Alarm aa Hath set2 Constent Hath set3 Tag TLOG Rolling average Alarm Delay Time gt 9 16 11 12 Next 3 3 Display menu Display 1 Group set Trip line 2 Color 3 Zone Graph 4 View Direction LCD 5 Hath Color 6 Hath Zone Graph 1 2 3 4 Next 1 2 Save Load Clear data menu Save Load Clear data 1 Save settings 2 Load settings 3 Save data 4 Load display data 5 Load event data 6 File Tist 7 Delete 8 Format 9 Clear data 1 2 3 4 Next 1 3 Soft key Settings in the Setting Mode Title Item 1 Range 5 1 to 5 7 Input type Measurement range Upper and lower limits of span Reference channel for difference computation Upper and lower limits of scale Unit Alarm 6 2 Alarm type Alarm value Output relay On Off Output relay number 2 Tag 7 1 Tag name Filter 5 8 Filter time constant Off RD MV102 RD MV104 Moving avarage 5 8 Alarm delay time 6 3 Number of samples for the moving average Off RD MV106 RD MV 112 3 Trend Save interval Trend display rate 7 3 Auto save interval 8 8 4 Message 7 5 Message string 5 Display 5 1 Group set Trip line Group name 7 6 Assign channels to groups 7 6 Trip line position display color 7 7 5 2 Color 7 8 Measurement channel display color 3 15 suoneiado uowwog 2poN UNY S 1ed JO SEEN 7 3 5 Configuring the Functions
12. suonesado uowwog 2poN UNy SHed JO SEWeN 3 5 Configuring the Functions Settings related to the display Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Display group 7 6 Group name 7 6 Channel assignment 7 6 Group display switching interval 7 13 Tag Channel display Tag name 7 1 Switch between tag display and channel display 7 2 Trend Display rate 7 3 Message 7 5 Trip line position display color 7 7 Trip line width 7 13 Channel display color 7 8 applies also to bar graphs Display direction vertical horizontal 7 13 Trend line width 7 13 Grid 7 13 Number of scale divisions 7 10 applies also to bar graphs Scale position 7 10 Zone upper and lower limits 7 9 Partial expansion display 7 11 Measurement channels to display the trend applies also to measurement channels that data are to be acquired 8 10 Use not use the partial expansion display 7 12 Bar graph Channel display color applies also to trends 7 8 Bar graph direction vertical horizontal 7 13 Number of display scale divisions applies also to trends 7 10 Bar graph base position 7 10 LCD Background color white or black 7 13 Brightness 7 14 Backlight saver specifications 7 14 Settings related to data storage Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Data acquisition 8 11 Types of data to be acquired Event data Sa
13. Explanation Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key The following table shows the mode range and measurable range Mode Range Measurable Range Note TC R 0 0 to 1760 0 C ANSI IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1981 S 0 0 to 1760 0 C ANSI IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1981 B 0 0 to 1820 0 C ANSI IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1981 K 200 0 to 1370 0 C ANSI IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1981 E 200 0 to 800 0 C ANSI IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1981 J 200 0 to 1100 0 C ANSI IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1981 T 200 0 to 400 0 C ANSI IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1981 N 0 0 to 1300 0 C Nicrosil Nisil IEC584 DIN IEC584 Ww 0 0 to 2315 0 C W 5 Re W 26 Re Hoskins Mfg Co L 200 0 to 900 0 C Fe CuNi DIN 43710 U 200 0 to 400 0 C Cu CuNi DIN 43710 RTD Pt100 200 0 to 600 0 C JIS 1604 1989 JIS C1606 1989 IEC751 DIN IEC751 JPt100 200 0 to 550 0 C JIS 1604 1981 JIS C1606 1989 Cut 200 0 to 300 0 C CU10 Q GE Cuid based on a particular manufacturer CU2 200 0 to 300 0 C CU10 Q L amp N Cuid based on a particular manufacturer CU3 200 0 to 300 0 C CU10 Q WEED Cuid based on a particular manufacturer CU4 200 0 to 300 0 C CU10 Q BAILAY Cuid based on a particular manufacturer CU5 2
14. If Auto auto save is selected in step 1 and Display is selected in step 2 set the auto save interval for the display data See section 8 8 8 23 wnp n abe10 sg jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eead 8 11 Setting the Method of the Display Event Data Acquisition Basic Setting Mode Acquiring only the event data 2 Data Select Event Boxes used to set the method for event data acquisition are displayed Note ____ If Manual manual save is selected in step 1 set whether to save all the data in the internal memory or only the data that have not been saved when the storage medium is inserted into the drive and the front cover is closed See section 8 10 3 Event Sample rate This is the sampling interval for the event data RD MV102 RD MV104 125 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5 s 10s 30s 60 s and 120s RD MV106 RD MV112 1s 2s 5s 10s 30s 60s 120s 4 Event Mode Select from Free Trigger or Rotate If Free is selected item 6 is displayed If Trigger or Rotate is selected items 5 6 7 and 8 are displayed 5 Event Block The event data storage area in the internal mamory is divided by the specified number Select 1 2 4 8 or 16 Select 1 2 or 4 when acquiring display and event data 6 Event Data length The size of the event data file is expressed as a length of time over which data are acquired The data length that can be specified varies depending on the sampl
15. 19 5 uopesado HuyIMS gt 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary 5 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the historical trend The displayed data are as follows When configured to acquire only the display data to the internal memory Display data e When configured to acquire only the event data to the internal memory Event data When configured to acquire the display data and the event data to the internal memory Data selected in the memory summary To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Recalling the historical trend at the time the message was written This operation is carried out on the Message Summary screen 1 Select the message of which to display the trend using the up and down arrow keys 004004 Message Time m POWER OFF Jan 9 2008 01 07 34 Selected message STOP Jan 09 2000 01 07 09 INPUT Jan 09 2000 01 05 41 POWER ON Jan 09 2000 01 05 10 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen menu 3 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 4 Select JUMP TO HISTORY using the up and down arrow keys izo INFOR P MATION JUMP TO HISTORY 5 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the historical trend The displayed data are as follows e When configured to acquire only the display data to the internal memory Display data When configured
16. CH31 i UNIT VV FV nV NV 2000 01 01 01 15 30 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 12 00 2000 01 01 01 18 12 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 12 00 Data size e Size of the header section The following equation can be used to derive the size of the header section Title carriage return line feed serial number carriage return line feed file header carriage return line feed channel tag 8 19 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed unit 6 9 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed The size of the title is fixed to 20 bytes The size of the serial number is fixed to 38 bytes The size of the file header is fixed to 49 bytes The size of the carriage return line feed is fixed to 2 bytes Calculation example Manual sampled data for 30 channels 20 2 38 2 49 2 8 19 x 30 2 6 9 x 30 2 971 bytes e Size of the data section of one data set The following equation can be used to derive the size of data section of one data set Date and time of manual sampling measured value 8 x number of measurement channe computed value 10 x number of computation channels carriage return line feed e The size of the date and time of creation is fixed to 19 bytes The size of the carriage return line feed is fixed to 2 bytes xipueddy z Calculation example Manual sampled data for 30 measurement channels 19 8 x 30 10 x 0 2 261 bytes Ap
17. Data acquisition can also be started or stopped via remote control or communication commands e The START STOP operation also starts stops the report function e When the computation is stopped it is started with the START key 8 6 Acquiring Event Data This operation is performed when the type of data acquired is set to Event or E D For setting the data acquisition method see sections 8 10 and 8 11 During Free Mode Start data acquisition To begin data acquisition press the START key The icon in the status display section will change accordingly e Stop data acquisition 1 Press the STOP key A confirmation window opens N ECET M On models with the computation option the confirmation window displays the following choices Mem Math terminate acquisition and all computations Memory terminate acquisition and Cancel 2 Select Yes Mem Math or Memory for models with the computation function using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key to stop the data acquisition The icon in the status display section changes to a stop icon Note e One file is created for one set of start and stop operations The maximum number of files that can be stored in the internal memory is 16 When the memory area becomes full or the number of files exceeds 16 existing data will be overwritten starting with the oldest data When a power disruption occurs the file is closed When t
18. Group name GROUP 1 CH set f1 02 03 04 Trip line Position Color PWN oS gt SEG S The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Group number Select the group number 1 to 4 2 On Off Move the cursor to the desired trip line and press the On soft key On Use the trip line The Position and Color boxes appear Off Not use the trip line 3 Position display position Specify the display position of the trip line in the range 0 to 100 of the display span 4 Color Select the color of the trip line from 16 colors 7 10 7 7 Setting the Trip Line Trend Explanation Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Initial colors of the trip lines Trip line No 1 Red Trip line No 2 Green Trip line No 3 Blue Trip line No 4 Yellow Available colors for the trip line Red green blue blue violet brown orange yellow green light blue violet gray limes cyan dark blue yellow silver and purple 7 11 Aejdsig y Bulyesado pue Huas 7 8 Setting the Channel Display Colors Trend Bar Graph Procedure Explanation Trend and bar graph colors can be specified for each channel These procedures are
19. These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw To display the setting screen press the soft key Time div imin 1 Auto save interval 1h The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Display update rate Time div Select the display rate from 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min 1 h 2 h and 4 h Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Note When Auto save is set for saving data to the external storage medium the Auto save interval box is displayed under Time div Auto save interval is the interval at which the display data residing in the internal memory are stored to the external storage medium The selectable values for Auto save interval vary depending on the Time div setting For the setting procedure see section 8 8 The display data sampling interval and the speed of
20. 2 0 ccc eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 15 scale specifications eect cece cee tee eee eee teres teeteeeneeee 7 17 OTS OM E A sca cutes a peasatn vanes TTT 4 5 MONS se she os vcs cesta ceatatesa cease craecaatarsee A 7 10 Zone GSP AY a ccisnveececsseesevcccesser cot aieeaa raaa 7 13 Tema SceeN astoren ersten eastern e tects 1 6 troubleshooting aiina aaa aaia 12 8 Index 3 U WU sss seta te aa rE OE RaT 5 10 5 12 11 11 WINS AVG ars savaten casts annaie aAa E A 8 21 Upper imit AA sa cieccctscdcteeeccesssesccesenastessrescatacstetes 1 17 6 6 upper limit on rate of change alarm 0cee 1 18 6 6 w 10 6 di ates Nad teh E autos tatvatt ase E EAE 10 7 V NOU epar E E E EE EEE 5 1 MOIUIME NAME EEE EE ames 9 11 W WeSky TEHON ainsin ares wiring AAM OUD aeaa ANE Eie FAIL Memory End TEMOLE CON aseran neinei X XOR re a E 11 6 Z ZIP GSK nsession a eiai aaaeeeaa ee 3 5 formatta aaa 9 11 9 12 ZONE GISPlAY neii noana Naa eer EEE a 1 8 Index 4 WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OMEGA ENGINEERING INC warrants this unit to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 13 months from date of purchase OMEGA s WARRANTY adds an additional one 1 month grace period to the normal one 1 year product warranty to cover handling and shipping time This ensures that OMEGA s customers receive maximum coverage on each product If the unit malfunctions it must be returned to the factory for evaluation
21. 2 4 2 3 Input Signal Wiring RD MV102 RD MV112 Input terminal position a Da g X x JOC J x JLX Input terminal x 0 0 Q Q 7 7 Terminal arrangement RD MV102 RD MV104 Standard input terminals Screw terminals H2 CH4 cH2 CH3 CH1 CHS CHI oog GEN GEN oor CH4 CH2 RD MV106 Standard input terminals Screw terminals CH6 CH4 CH2 CH5 CH3 CH1 RD MV106 RD MV112 Standard input terminals Screw terminals CH12 CH10 CH8 CH6 CH4 CH2 CH11 CH9 CH7 CH5 CH3 CH1 goooga Jooo CH12 CH10 CH8 Note RTD input terminals A and B are isolated on each channel Terminal b is shorted internally across all channels However for options N1 Cu10 Cu25 RTD input 3 terminal isolated RTD and N2 3 terminal iso lated RTD input b is isolated for each channel 1 p109 4 oy Husn 210499 e 2 3 Input Signal Wiring Wiring diagram DC Voltage and DI Contact Input Y HE DC voltage input Q
22. 5 Buffer data at the Buffer data at the Buffer data at the nth sampling n 1th sampling n 2th sampling New data New data 15 0 mV 10 0 mV Deleted Deleted Integration Time of the A D Converter The recorder uses an A D converter to convert the sampled analog signal to a digital signal By setting the integration time to match the time period corresponding to one cycle of the power supply or an integer multiple of one cycle the power supply frequency noise can be effectively eliminated The integration time of the A D converter is selected according to the model from the table below If Auto is selected the recorder will automatically detect the power supply frequency and select 16 7 ms or 20 ms Because 100 ms is an integer multiple of 16 7 ms and 20 ms this setting can be used to eliminate the power frequency noise for either frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz 100 ms is available on the RD MV106 and RD MV112 For the setting procedure see section 5 9 Model Integration Time of the A D Converter RD MV102 RD MV104 Select 16 7 ms 60 Hz 20 ms 50 Hz or auto automatically switches 16 7 ms 20 ms fixed to 20 ms for 12 VDC power supply model RD MV106 RD MV112 Select 16 7 ms 60 Hz 20 ms 50 Hz 100 ms or auto automatically switches 16 7 ms 20 ms fixed to 20 ms for 12 VDC power supply model 1 4 1 3 Display Function Common Items Related to the Display 5 5 TFT color LCD and the screen config
23. Avem ABE C WARRANTY Extended a Program Shop online at omega com CEOMEGA www omega com e mail info omega com isog001 1509002 ERTIFIED CORPORATE QUALITY ERTIFIED CORPORATE QUALITY STAMFORD CT MANCHESTER UK 5 5 inch wide viewing angle color LCD display Digital display area RD MV100 status display area The display updating interval is 1 second Trend display area Power ON OFF switch The fastest trend display updating rate is 1 min div approximately 615 Removable storage drive mm h in terms of display speed Recorder omega com CEOMEGA OMEGAnet Online Service Internet e mail www omega com info omega com USA ISO 9001 Certified Canada Servicing North America One Omega Drive P O Box 4047 Stamford CT 06907 0047 TEL 203 359 1660 FAX 203 359 7700 e mail info omega com 976 Bergar Laval Quebec H7L 5A1 TEL 514 856 6928 FAX 514 856 6886 e mail info omega ca For immediate technical or application assistance USA and Canada Mexico Benelux Czech Republic France Germany Austria United Kingdom ISO 9002 Certified Sales Service 1 800 826 6342 1 800 TC OMEGA Customer Service 1 800 622 2378 1 800 622 BEST Engineering Service 1 800 872 9436 1 800 USA WHEN TELEX 996404 EASYLINK 62968934 CABLE OMEGA En Espa ol 001 203 359 7803 e mail espanol
24. DATA0 000 and the second set of data are saved to DATAO 001 e When the directory name is changed the sequence number is reset to zero e When the data are divided and saved over multiple external storage media due to lack of space on the storage medium the same directory name is used e Ifthe specified directory already exists in the external storage medium an error message is displayed and the operation terminates data are not saved When Using Auto Save Procedure Data are automatically stored by leaving the external storage medium inserted in the drive For the data storage operation see section 8 4 1 Insert the external medium into the drive and then press the MEDIA key to detect it Note For the memory usage display of the internal memory see section 4 2 To check the free space on the storage medium see section 9 5 For the name of the directory in which the data are saved see section 8 9 When the external storage medium does not have enough space Replace the storage medium that is inserted in the drive 1 The message Not enough free space on media appears Change the external storage medium The unsaved data are saved to the external storage medium at the time for the next auto save execution Note ____ Be aware that data in the internal memory will be overwritten if there is not enough free space on the external storage medium or if the storage medium is not inserted in the drive in the follow
25. Determines the average AVE maximum MAX minimum MIN and maximum minimum P P at specified time intervals for the specified channels You can specify the interval Rolling average Determines the moving average of the computed result at scan intervals for the channel for which the equation is specified The sampling interval and the number of samples are specified for each channel The maximum sampling interval is 1 hour the maximum number of samples is 64 The initial setting is set so that the rolling average is disabled The following elements can be used in the computing equations Element Description Constants KO1 to K12 Set by the computation function Communication input data Communication C01 to C12 Set by the communication function RD MV100 Interface User s Manual Condition of the remote control terminals D01 to D08 Use ON OFF 1 or 0 of the remote input signal 1 20 1 8 Computation Function and Report Function M1 Option Report Function The report function is one of the functions provided by the optional computation function M1 This function computes the average maximum minimum and sum for the specified channels at specified intervals and writes the result to the internal memory You can select the report type from hourly reports only daily reports only daily and monthly reports and weekly and monthly reports The reports are created
26. Failed the transfer connection LISTEN Failed the transfer connection reception ACCEPT Failed to accept the transfer connection SOCKNAME Internal processing error RECV Failed to receive data over the transfer connection SEND Failed to send data over the transfer connection 286 FTP file transfer error 1 See the RD MV100 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 2 Contact your nearest Omega dealer 3 These errors may occur if the network experiences trouble during the data transmission bad cable connection duplicate addresses network equipment failure Note The FTP client function on the recorder has a timer function that drops the connection if there is no data transfer for two minutes If the server does not respond within this time period the transfer fails The FTP client function on the recorder overwrites files with the same file names on the server without any warnings unless the server rejects the request For information regarding the FTP client function of this recorder see the RD MV100 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 Communication Errors For information regarding the communication function of this recorder see the RD MV100 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 Errors during Setting and Basic Setting Modes Output Communication Command Execution and Setup Data Loading Code Message 300 Command is too long
27. INPUT _ Hessaged STOP HessageS Hessageb Hessage Hessage 2 4 0 827 8 828 essagel Nessage2Nessage3 Messaged Note Messages can be displayed on the trend display and written into the internal memory along with the display data file and the event data file while data acquisition is in progress 7 4 This page intentionally left blank Aejdsig y Buneiado pue Huas 7 5 This page intentionally left blank 7 6 7 5 Setting the Message String Trend Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw To display the setting screen press the soft key 4 Hessage No Characters 1 1 POWER OFF INPUT STOP i __ SS oann awn The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Characters Move the cursor to the desired message number Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the message string Enter the message string up to 16 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For t
28. Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Twice press the soft key Next 1 3 Press the soft key To display the setting screen press the soft key 8 l Timer lt TLOG Number Hode Interval Reset Action Timer lt TLOG 1 1 Number i 1 Relative 2 Hode Absolute 2 01 00 3 Interval in 6 Ref time o g3 _ ____ 7 Off E 4 Reset Off oS off 5 Action off __ 9 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Setting the relative timer 1 Timer Number Select the desired timer number Mode Select Relative Interval Reset and Action are displayed Interval Set the time to the next timeout Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the time Enter the time 00 01 to 24 00 and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Reset On Resets the TLOG value when the timer expires Off Does not reset the TLOG value when the timer expires Action DataSave Stores the instantaneous values of all measurement computation channels to the internal memory when the time expires Off Does not store the measured computed data 11 18 11 9 Setting the Timer Basic Setting Mode Explanation Setting the absolute timer 2 Mode Select Absolute Interval Reset Ref time a
29. To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Scrolling the waveform Pressing the up or down arrow key vertical display or the left or right arrow key horizontal display while displaying the historical trend scrolls the waveform along the time axis 4 19 su 195 uopesado BulyosyuMs gt 4 6 Using the Historical Trend Specifying the displayed position with the cursor The cursol position on the all data dispay locates the reference position Enclosed in parentheses are for the horizontal trend display 1 Pressing the right up arrow key displays the all data display in the right upper section of the screen Reference position Cursor _ All data display 2 Move the cursor to select the displayed position using the up and down left and right arrow keys 3 Pressing the left down arrow key switches to the historical trend screen with shifted waveforms Display the current trend data and the historical trend data Displays the current display data on the upper right half of the screen and the historical trend on the lower left half of the screen 1 Pressing the left down arrow key displays the current trend and the historical trend To return to the previous screen press the up arrow key Displaying the memory information 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu TREND HISTORY is selected 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu
30. To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select INFORMATION ON using the up and down arrow keys 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the window with the memory information For models with the batch function batch number and lot number information of the display event data displayed as a historical trend is also displayed 5 To clear the window press the DISP ENTER key or one of the arrow keys 4 20 4 6 Using the Historical Trend Explanation Background color of the historical trend The background color of the historical trend is either black or white opposite of the background color displayed for the current trend Historical trend Time axis Expanding Reducing rate ale m Icons for switching screens Reference position 2 3 Tag Channel 6 968 le 6 968 6 968 o7 8 512 2 9 7 8 514 0 376 x 2 Y v Y Y Unit j Maximum and minimum Maximum and minimum values at the reference position values among the data displayed For event data the measured computed value at the display reference position su 1995 uopesado HuyIMS gt Historical trend displaying the current trend and the historical trend E Eos fish 1216 Ee Data from the current trend Note _____ It is possible that not all of the digits of the maximum and minimum values of the computation channel data will be displayed 4 21 Chapter 5 Measurement Channel S
31. class A use in a commercial industrial or business environment The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation If this recorder is used in a manner not specified in this manual the protecition provided by this recorder may be impaired Omega assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements The following symbols are used on this instrument A IF gt O 2 Handle with care To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to the explanation in the User s Manual or Service Manual High temperature To avoid injury caused by hot surface do not touch the heat sink Functional ground terminal Do not use this terminal as a protective ground terminal Protective ground terminal AC ON power OFF power Safety Precautions Make sure to comply with the following safety precautions Failure to comply may result in injury or death electric shock hazard Power Supply Ensure that the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning ON the power Power Cord and Plug Desktop Type To prevent an electric shock or fire be sure to use the power cord supplied by Omega The main power plug must be plugged into an outlet with a protective grounding terminal Do not invalidate protection by using an extension cord without protective grounding Protective Grounding M
32. 00 to 79 represent year 2000 to 2079 80 to 99 represent 1980 to 1999 Setting the time at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be enabled disabled These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w Press the softkey Next 1 3 To display the setting screen press the soft key 6 Daylight saving time MM DD HH Summer M 00 05 01 00 Winter On 99 11 81 08 1 2 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 On Off Select whether or not to use the daylight savings time adjustment function If On is selected a box used to enter the year month and day appears If this parameter is set to On and the summer winter time is set this parameter turns Off automatically when the set time is elapsed Summer Winter Set the time at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be enabled disabled Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the year month day and time Enter the values and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to enteri
33. 5 5 Scaling Setting Explanation 6 Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Allowed range 30000 to 30000 Decimal position The decimal can be set in the following positions 1 0IL1 gn Ee ee auaddg The decimal position is determined by the scale lower limit setting Note Scale lower limit and scale upper limit cannot be set to the same value The recorder converts the measured data within a value span derived by removing the decimal from the scaling upper and lower limits In other words conversion is performed by using a span of 10 if the scale setting is 5 to 5 and 100 if the scale setting is 5 0 to 5 0 The resolution of the value derived by using a span of 10 is coarser than the value derived using a span of 100 Because the display becomes rough set this value so that it is greater than 100 7 Unit Set the unit Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a character string Enter the unit up to 6 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Confirming operation To confirm th
34. 8 A 4 977 le B 977 0 514 8 976 0 513 0 977 v v Y Y Unit Measured computed value Measured computed value maximum and minimum maximum and minimum value at the display value over the entire reference position display range For event data the measured computed value at the display reference position 1 3 Display Function The waveform can be scrolled along the time axis using the cursor keys e The time axis can be expanded or reduced e The entire data of the file that is being displayed on the historical trend can be displayed at the top section of the screen right section if the trend display is vertical You can specify the position to be displayed on the historical trend display using a cursor The specified position becomes the display reference position Reference position Cursor _ All data display e The memory information of the file being displayed on the historical trend can be displayed For models with the batch function BT1 option information such as the batch number and lot number are also displayed File name and data type Serial number of the instrument that sampled the data Start stop time and user name user name is displayed only when the key login function is used Half screen display only when displaying the historical trend of the display data Displays the historical trend of the display data on the left half of the screen
35. 83h 41h 10days 41 days In case measurement ch 6 ch mathematical ch 0 ch Display data file only approx Display Rate i min div 20 min 30 min 60 min 240 min Sampling TEER 40s 60s 120s 480s Sampling Length 23 days 34 days 69 days 277 days Event data file only approx Sampling Interval 1s 5s 10s 30s 60s 120s Sampling Length 27h 5 days 11 days 34 days 69 days 138 days Display data file Event data file Display data file approx Display Rate min div 30 min 240 min Sampling Interval s 60s 480 s Sampling Length Event data file 26 days 208 days approx Sampling Interval 1s 5s 10s 30s 60s 120s Sampling Length 6 9h 34h 2days 8 days 17 days 34 days Manual sample data Trigger Trigger Types Data format Screen image data Trigger Data format Output Key operation or remote contact Data format ASCII Max number of data sets internal memory can hold 50 data sets TLOG data only for computation option Timeout of the timer Report data only for computation option Hourly daily daily monthly and daily weekly ASCII Key operation png format External storage medium or communication interface 14 7 suonesioads 14 4 Alarm Function Specifications Number of alarms Alarm types Alarm delay time Up to four alarms for each channel Upper and lower limits delay upper
36. Access lamp for the flopppy disk drive The access lamp is lit while the floppy disk is being accessed 3 2 3 1 Names of Parts and Functions Rear Panel 2 3 RS 232 1 AC power supply 3 RS 422A RS 485 I a PEOL o o J 0 amp 3 3 3 z 5 3 CRISS SS SSesi 5 a ie a 5 SSA SATEBAH SJDATBAE 5 z D i 9 vu 2 Q 5 a J 53 1 12 VDCpower supply 5 1 Power terminals S Connect the power cord S 2 Ethernet port 3 Connect the Ethernet cable 10Base T a 3 Serial interface port 3 RS 232 port or RS 422 A 485 port depending on the specification Connect the S serial interface cable 9 4 Input terminals Connect the input signal cable of the item being measured 5 Option terminals Connect optional input output signal cables Note lt See RD MV100 Communication interface user s manual to use Ethernet port and the serial interface port Desktop Type 1 Carrying handle 2 Foot
37. Hode Range Span L Span U av 2 008 2 090 Scale L Scale U Unit aa 200 00 2 3 5 6 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 2 Mode Set the mode to Sqrt 3 Range Select the input range from 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2 V 6 V and 20 V 4 Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the measurement span Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Note Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value sBuijes jauueyo jusweinseay 7 5 6 Square Root Computation Setting Explanation 5 Upper and lower limits of scale Set the upper and lower limits of the scale Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Allowed range 30000 to 30000 Decimal position The decimal can be set in the following positions J OOHO ee ee auaddg The decimal position is determined by the scale lower limit sett
38. OMEGA s Customer Service Department will issue an Authorized Return AR number immediately upon phone or written request Upon examination by OMEGA if the unit is found to be defective it will be repaired or replaced at no charge OMEGA s WARRANTY does not apply to defects resulting from any action of the purchaser including but not limited to mishandling improper interfacing operation outside of design limits improper repair or unauthorized modification This WARRANTY is VOID if the unit shows evidence of having been tampered with or shows evidence of having been damaged as a result of excessive corrosion or current heat moisture or vibration improper specification misapplication misuse or other operating conditions outside of OMEGA s control Components which wear are not warranted including but not limited to contact points fuses and triacs OMEGA is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various products However OMEGA neither assumes responsibility for any omissions or errors nor assumes liability for any damages that result from the use of its products in accordance with information provided by OMEGA either verbal or written OMEGA warrants only that the parts manufactured by it will be as specified and free of defects OMEGA MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EXCEPT THAT OF TITLE AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FO
39. Reference time for the absolute timer Turn ON OFF reset at each interval Turn ON OFF data saving to the storage medium 10 Communications 10 1 Ethernet IP_Address 10 2 Ethernet DNS 10 3 FTP transfer file 10 4 FTP connection 10 5 Control login timeout 10 6 Serial Memory out End End 3 6 Terminate operations in the basic setting mode See RD MV100 Communication Interface User s Manual 3 18 3 6 Common Key Operations This section describes common key operations that are used often Soft keys Arrow keys DISP ENTER key Key Operations in the Basic Setting Mode Entering the basic setting mode 1 Press the MENU key to enter the setting mode 2 Hold the FUNC key down for three seconds to enter the basic setting mode 3 Press the soft key to enter individual setting screens Note Basic setting mode cannot be entered while data acquisition or computation is in progress Stop data acquisition and computation first before entering the basic setting mode e Changing and storing the data acquiring method in the basic setting mode 3 Memory and 4 Memory and trend clears the measured computed data in the internal memory Make sure to save the data to the external storage medium before entering the basic setting mode Common key operations in the basic setting mode are described Alarm Reflash Off Relay AND
40. damage the drives 2 1 1 p102 4 oy Husn a10jog e 2 2 Installing the Recorder Installation Location Install the recorder in a location that meets the following conditions See also the normal operating conditions described in section 14 7 General Specifications CAUTION For safety reasons don t mount the recorder with the back panel downwards Well ventilated location To prevent overheating install the recorder in a well ventilated location A space of 50 mm or more from the right left and top surface of the recorder is recommended Minimum mechanical vibrations Choose an installation location with the minimum mechanical vibration Horizontal Install the recorder horizontally However the recorder can be reclined up to 30 degrees when the front feet are up Note Condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where both the ambient temperature and humidity are higher or if the temperature changes rapidly In addition measurement errors will result when using thermocouples In this case let the instrument adjust to the new environment for at least one hour before using the instrument e The lifetime of the LCD may be shortened if the recorder is used in a high temperature environment over a long period of time When installing the recorder in a high temperature environment greater than 40 C we recommend the backlight brightness of the LCD be set to a low setting Fo
41. e Relational computation Determines lt lt gt 2 and outputs 0 or 1 Logical computation Determines the AND logical product OR logical sum XOR exclusive logical sum of two channels NOT negation of an arbitrary channel and outputs O or 1 Statistical computation TLOG Determines the sum maximum minimum average and maximum minimum P P values at specified time intervals over the time interval There are three timers used to set the time interval For detail see section 11 7 Data that can be Used in Equations The following types of data are used to perform computations For TLOG computation only measured and computed data can be used For all other computations all types of data can be used Measured data The data are specified using channel numbers in computing equations If scaling is in effect the scaled values are used in the computation Computed data The data are specified using channel numbers in computing equations Constants K01 to K12 The values assigned to K01 to K12 can be used as constants Enter the values as K01 to K12 in the equations Range of constants Maximum number of significant digits is 5 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog 11 1 Overview of the Computation Function Unit Handling Communication input data C01 to C12 Data that have been specified through the
42. gt gt ATA flash memory card lt gt The data that have been saved to an external storage medium can be displayed on a PC using the standard software that comes with the package The data can also be loaded into the RD MV100 to be displayed By using the Ethernet interface that comes standard with the RD MV100 the data can be transferred to a server on a network client function The data stored on the RD MV100 s external storage medium can also be read from a PC on the network server function Primary Secondary The communication functions such as the Ethernet interface are not covered in this manual See the RD MV100 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 1 1 1 2 Functions of the Input Section Number of Measurement Channels Scan Interval The number of measurement channels and scan intervals for different models are listed in the table below For the procedure related to setting the scan interval see section 5 9 Model Number of Measurement Channels Scan Interval RD MV102 2 channels 125 ms or 250 ms RD MV104 4 channels 125 ms or 250 ms RD MV106 6 channels 1sor2s RD MV112 12 channels 1sor2s Input Type and Computation You can select the input type of a measurement channel from DC voltage thermocouple resistance temperature detector RTD and ON OFF input contact signal or voltage signal You can also perform computation on th
43. h An alarm occurs when the difference between the measured values of two channels becomes greater than or equal to the alarm value Difference lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the difference between the measured values of two channels becomes smaller than or equal to the alarm value Upper limit on rate of change alarm R The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is checked An alarm occurs when the amount of increase becomes greater than or equal to the specified value see section 6 4 The time interval is specified using a number of measurements 6 6 6 2 Alarm Setting Name Symbol Description Lower limit on rate of change alarm The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is checked An alarm occurs when the amount of decrease becomes greater than or equal to the specified value see section 6 4 The time interval is specified using a number of measurements Delay upper limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value remains above or equal to the alarm value for the specified time period delay period see section 6 3 Setting the Alarm Delay Period Delay lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below or equal to the alarm value for the specified time period delay period see section 6 3 Setting the Alarm Delay Period 1 Can be specified only on differe
44. or No and press the DISP ENTER key ejeg BHuilziyeniuy pue saji4 Huibeuey el 9 1 Saving Loading Setup Data Loading Setup Data In the Setting Mode Procedure Loads the setup data set in the setting mode only from a setup file in the external storage medium and make the settings effective Setting items that are inconsistent with the content of the basic setting mode of the recorder will not be acquired Returns to the operation mode when loading is completed e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press the softkey Next 1 3 Press soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen 2 Press 2 soft key to display the Load settings screen Load settings File name Time SET1 PNL File list A PNL 2000 01 01 04 18 AAAG PNL 2000 01 02 00 53 SET2 PNL 2000 01 01 00 35 SAITO PNL 2000 01 15 03 27 KATSU PNL 1999 09 14 15 47 1 Allist of setup files in the storage medium appears Select the file to be loaded The extension of setup files is PNL To cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Clear data menu press the ESC key 2 Press the DISP ENTER key to load the file After loading the screen returns to the operation mode The loaded setup data are made effective Note If the loaded data does not take effect refer to the error log For the procedure related to displayi
45. see section 8 10 For the procedure used to assign channels to groups see section 7 6 su 195 uopesado BulyosyuMs gt Alarm indication Alarms are checked at all times and displayed on the relevant displays regardless of whether or not the waveform of the trend display is shown Alarms are displayed using alarm type symbols For details related to the alarms see section 6 2 Name Symbol Upper limit alarm H Lower limit alarm L Difference upper limit alarm h Difference lower limit alarm l Upper limit on rate of change alarm R Lower limit on rate of change alarm r Delay upper limit alarm T Delay lower limit alarm t The display direction of the trend and the bar graph For the setting procedure of the display direction of the trend and the bar graph see section 7 13 4 9 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Trend vertical display Scale ___ Display update rate Time div ka H Im n 06 42 Ta Message r Trip line 4 Channel Tag 58 H 8 053 Measured computed value y i Unit 4 Alarm mark Trend vertical display all channel display Waveform of all channels t Data of selected group Digital MUP 1 Channel Tag 0 675 163 56 y 2 4 0 677 0 677 Measured computed value y y Unit Hoos BE H
46. 14 18 partial expansion display cece 1 8 7 20 7 22 password Key COCK ssnin e a 10 2 keylogger EErEE 10 7 p rodic maimtenanGE sosisini eeens 13 1 ELONE EE A cee 11 4 POWER SWIC oessa a E E 3 4 power terminal sisiraan teste aA TRE RaR 3 3 R PR PE EES OEE E 4 9 6 6 Taaie in e a aa aa 4 9 6 7 rate of change alarm ssssssssisssneisisssrnsisinnnnnnninnnnnen nne 6 11 e E E EEA AN T AT 3 3 reference junction compensation s s ssssssseesineeee 1 3 5 15 EE E a E E E E A relational computation EMOTE COMMO iristen esra ia EE ANTAL AAE PE ESTA report data format eevseiiecseiscrsrectusiececenvaescesiaperncenaersccseaeecees App 9 CoE D aa E EE E E E E 4 15 TUMGHOM ss scss ceo svsesecteeses cooeeare E EE 1 21 Teinit a le PEE E A AA E AAA T 11 26 Stary StoP E OT 11 25 AY PO e EE A iativeatiaateiseds 11 22 FEPOM ata eanna Ada cesie yea ttecasee ares 8 9 FEPOMTUNCHOM aE E sie resi tearee vieaines dennis 11 22 resistance temperature detector ceeeeeeeeeeeereee 5 3 ASG esas E S ceases tes aka eure aeennseseeneicee 5 15 FOINQSAVELAGESY assenaar ar EE 11 20 ADD cscs a 5 3 rubber strips TEPIACEMENE sssrinin 13 5 PUN MORE sis ccccccsssvevcccesnierccsssipessin stspnecucsensrcnde stat ecicceriaccevaes 3 7 S saving setup data basic setting mode sc ninteNalieeneaaa a a 1 2 5 15 SCEOMIM AGES arerin a aaaeaii aiaia aeaa 9 13 serial interface pOT sisstin E 3 3 Setting Modes iaei EEEE EEN ANETES
47. 3 7 COMMUTATION si iearii aranes raer Eaa EENE EEEE a aT 3 11 intial SENGS cenn App 1 key OPGTAtON sess ccs irni iaiia aiia 3 20 SOft KEY crannan ore eee Ea aE 3 2 specifications PaE I KAA EEE EE R A TE EE 14 8 COMMUNICATION sarisin IA EN 14 9 data Strage lanice iseayeiiiea aiea seei aieea naaa 14 5 QISplAY sacisesccccices cece tsstecccntecteccde edececiet caaea i iau iR EENEN 14 3 generale asisas ieina aE aE EE 14 13 normal operating Conditions cece eee 14 15 Optional FUNCHONS cies ccccneanssrecensersccsesderccesnaeccctenaers 14 10 PWET SUDPIY ccein aaia aiin EAEE 14 15 SOE a a a EE VE e AE P 5 11 square TOOL armmosossnaar anaE 5 11 11 4 Status display SECON cciavescccccvse ccetivseacccuaserveciaseeccnmereins 4 2 Storage FUNCTION ccceesstsssseseresnsseserecassnserasassnseeesaseane 1 15 SUMMA sess desk coed cesvecesesuareccse A T 11 15 SYSTEM SCHOO wives cries cin sere scciescrecitersamentin cennranaeness 1 25 10 8 T T sinwveccsuupweseseanuictseesnasnsnesatan ie V ASEE E EEEE A A T E E ET tag hamo rimara nat A theese tags or channel WG annenin thermocouple TLOG COMPULANOM nyeseg sriti ei 11 7 TLOG data norenpuinsnnnen naa tatabncancatanes cacti 8 9 trend CN ANNGNS E ET lt daecuunseedseced display direction oF GISPlay Rate eis aeae enaa Ea DUNG WACK Sei ccetias cacact asreacends sve cas ausesncassevertearessamsaaces line Width Of the trip line sissies 7 23 scale display POSItION
48. AVE SUM MAX MIN Only measurement channels and computation channels can be used in the TLOG computation In the explanation below e1 is used to represent a measurement or computation channel You cannot specify an equation that contains a computing element inside e1 In addition only one TLOG computation can be specified in a single computing equation TLOG MAX Syntax TLOG MAX e1 Result Computes the maximum value of channel e1 TLOG MIN Syntax TLOG MIN e1 Result Computes the minimum value of channel e1 TLOG AVE Syntax TLOG AVE e1 Result Computes the average value of channel e1 TLOG SUM Syntax TLOG SUM e1 Result Computes the summation of channel e1 TLOG P P Syntax TLOG SUM e1 Result Computes the maximum value minimum value of channel e1 Rules for Writing an Equation Common Items Follow the rules below in writing the computing equations Use up to 40 characters to write equations The precedence of computing terms can be specified using parentheses Specify the channels in the equation using channel numbers Example Channel 1 is O1 or 1 You can use 01 or 1 for example to specify one digit numbers for channels constants communication input data and conditions of the remote control terminals in equations Example 01 1 KO1 K1 C01 C1 DO1 D1 The data value for the channel used in the equation and for all channels greater in number than
49. Alarm mark Bar graph vertical display c gt ical IS Ih 1 2 3 Tag Channel a BE amp Alarm mark 2 000 2 500 3 000 3 500 Upper limit of span a Alarm point mark Bar graph 2 000 2 500 3 000 z saa Lower limit of span c Vi E Ui Cc vI 9 vi Unit 8 712 8 718 8 711 af Measured computed value 4 10 4 4 Using the Overview Screen Operation Flow Diagram Screen menu Overview screen Screen menu Sub menu A v A A lt gt v d v On TREND Channel To BAR GRAPH selection Cursor ON OFF Screen menu Sub menu DISP ENTER key 4 4 gt _ Arrow keys Procedure Displaying the screen 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 2 Select Trend Digital or Bar Graph using the up and down arrow keys Select Overview using the up and down arrow keys 3 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key su 19 5 uopesado BulyoyMsS Displaying or clearing the cursor 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select CURSOR ON or CURSOR OFF The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu FE OvERVIEW gt CURSOR OFF SFE o
50. CIME innn stevie ATA fl sh memory Card isisisi wetectdeecasestencesneetecicnses TORMARING egiii easi e i cad decison Aut lOQOUE escccvineivccese ieena cess ssa ccceethuerecesnntescesaneeccestans AUTO SAVE hodiaiia aaa iae Eaa EARE auto SAVE iterv l osisssa s backgro nd Color rriari rA 7 23 backlight saver bar graph DASE POSINOM esseri enaura EEE display direction LE E E E E Gasca cuter E E bpargrap Scr EM aeeaiei gs A NE e basic setting mode i CONNGUrANO Mi nie a MASEM S neipraat KY OPEratOM lt secsccsicscscestcsececseccsesessesccecssaesasarstesterer seats parameteSononatrenn ninan battery replace Ment sssrinin 13 5 DYIQNtn SS cicisseesccsseis ccciseescesatayersesssvenccevsaeccsesmveveerayeneces 7 25 DUMMOUT Tiana Masta its aaa a TE 1 3 5 15 C calculation expression x CAB atO scene crea sseripees tere sctvesersseveaneruhy esas aaeseacagieess Channels tobe Stored wcciccciiccccvecescoseteass csesteies cectiadesasuecees COMMENT seasccsesccnecssss cdhcounseds hess aiis COMMON logarithm cece eee eee cece eseseeeeeeteeseeeeeeeeees COMMUNICATION 2 2 2 ccc cece ce ccecnsteceneessaceneevssasevaevensdeves computation communication input dat sxs isisisi 11 2 CONSTANT aiseee sieaas 11 14 ata dropout PEA EE E T 11 9 YPE eooo nas e Eea iaaavicaviaaats ant Gabariee 1 20 11 1 COMPUtAtION OVEFIOW x siisssisesisiudsrnsasnnisrncasassrsksasasnain anak App 8 CONE sariaren aasa ieia 5 5 D d
51. Channel 12 Cyan Available colors for the channels Red green blue blue violet brown orange yellow green light blue violet gray limes cyan dark blue yellow silver and purple 7 12 7 9 Using Zone Displays Trend Procedure By using zones the waveforms of each channel can be displayed in their own zones Because the waveforms do not overlap they are easier to view These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press the softkey Next 1 3 Press the soft key O Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key Setting on a computation channel option To display the setting screen press the soft key o 2 1 First CH 81 Last CH 81 Partial off Division 4 Bar graph Normal Scale position 1 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here Graph and Partial are also simultaneously set 2 Zone upper limit and lower limit The wav
52. D Data length 3 min to 31 days Up to other parameters set Pre trigger 0 5 25 50 75 95 100 Trigger Key On Off External On Off Alarm On Off Memory and Meas CH Math CH Math CH trend First CH Up to model types Last CH On Off AUX Tag Channel Memory alarm 5h 10h 100 h Language German French Partial Batch For models with BT1 App 4 Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Keylock Use Not Use No O e password Character string START Free Lock STOP Free Lock MENU Free Lock MEDIA Free Lock DISP ENTER Free Lock Alarm ACK Free Lock Math Free Lock ARpA Free Lock Media Free Lock Key login Use Not Use Auto logout On Off User ID Use Not Use Not Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 On Off On Off User name User 1 to User 7 Character string User ID 1to7 Password Enter setup Enable Disable Save Load Save settings Initialize Load settings Delete Format Initialize Option Action NO 1 to NO 8 Start Stop _ Trigger Alatm ACK Remote Time adj Math Math rst M sample Start Stop Pnl 1 load Pnl 2 load Pnl 3 load Message 1 Message 2 Message3 Message4 Message 5 Message 6 Message7 Message 8 Option Mode Off Relative Initial setting Timer 1 Absolute Timer Interval Absolute 1 min 2 min 3 min 4min Timer 2 3 Off TLOG
53. Day Creates daily reports Day Week Creates daily and weekly reports Day Month Creates daily and monthly reports 2 Date Day of the week This is the date or day of the week on which the report is created If the Report set is set to Day Month Date is displayed If Day Week is specified Day is displayed If Hour or Day is specified Date is displayed However this setting is void Date for monthly reports Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the date Enter the date 01 28 and press the DISP ENTER key Procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 You cannot specify 30 or 31 e Day for weekly reports Enter the day of the week using the soft key 11 26 11 13 Setting the Report Function Explanation 3 Time hour Set the time to create daily weekly and monthly reports with the time on the hour 00 to 23 Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the time Enter the time and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 This setting is void for hourly reports 4 Report CH This is the report data number to which the measurement computation channel is assigned Select from R01 to R12 The reports are output in order according to this number 5 On Off On Assign channels to Report CH Off Do not assign report ch
54. EMC Standards Safety standards EMC standards Power supply to ground terminal 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute except for P1 model Power supply to ground terminal 500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute for P1 model Contact output terminal to ground terminal 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute Measuring input terminal to ground terminal 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute Between measuring input terminals 1000 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute except for b terminal of RTD input of RD MV106 and RD MV112 Between remote control terminal to ground terminal 500 VDC 1 minute Certified by CSA22 2 No 1010 1 and UL3111 1 CSA NRTL C Complies with EN61010 1 option Installation category Overvoltage category II Pollution degree 22 1 Installation category Overvoltage category describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition It implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage Il applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like distribution board 2 Pollution degree describes the degree to which a solid liquid or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering 2 applies to normal indoor atmosphere Normally only non conductive pollution occurs Complies with EN61326 1 option suonesiioeds 14 17 14 8 Dimentional Drawings Unit mm Rear View approv inch
55. For details contact Omega Required Instruments For calibrating the recorder calibration instruments with the following resolution are necessary Recommended instruments e DC voltage standard Omega Model 2552 or equivalent Main specifications Accuracy of output in the range 20 mV to 20 V 0 005 Decade resistance box Omega Model 2793 01 or equivalent Main specifications Accuracy of output in the range 0 1 to 500 Q 0 001 Resolution 0 001 Q To purchase these instruments contact the supplier of this recorder Calibration Procedure 1 Connect the recorder and the calibration instruments as shown in the following figure and allow the instruments to warm up adequately The warm up time for the recorder is at least 30 minutes 2 Check that the ambient temperature and humidity are within the normal operating conditions See chapter 14 3 Apply input signals corresponding to 0 50 and 100 of the specified input range and calculate the errors from the readings If the error is not within the accuracy specifications contact Omega Note For TC input the temperature of the input terminals must be measured and a voltage corresponding to the temperature at the reference junction must be added DC voltage measurement example for the RD MV112 Y Jueu zule N 2
56. For monthly reports MONTHLY 46 bytes e The size of the serial number is fixed to 38 bytes The size of the file header is fixed to 49 bytes The size of the carriage return line feed is fixed to 2 bytes xipueddy z Calculation example Monthly data for 30 channels 46 2 38 2 49 2 8 19 x 30 2 6 9 x 30 2 997 bytes App 9 Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Size of the data section of one report data set The following equation can be used to derive the size of data section of one report data Carriage return line feed date and time of creation status 11 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed average value 5 14 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed maximum value 5 14 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed minimum value 5 14 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed sum value 5 14 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed e The size of the date and time of creation is fixed to 16 bytes e The size of the carriage return line feed is fixed to 2 bytes Calculation example Monthly data for 30 channels 2 16 11 x30 2 5 14x30 2 54 14x30 4 2 5 14x 30 424 54 14 x 30 2 2058 bytes Number of report data sets and file size The file size varies depending on the number of report data sets as follows e One report data set of m
57. If a computation dropout occurs make the scan interval longer see section 5 9 or reduce the number of computation channels that are turned On see section 11 4 9 Key lock icon Key icon Key lock ON No display Key lock OFF 10 Alarm icon Displayed when any one of the alarms is occurring For details see chapter 6 4 4 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Operation Flow Diagram TREND DIGITAL BAR GRAPH Screen menu Sub menu Operation screens Screen menu Sub menu TREND gt _ _ v A Group channels PE All channels y Scale ON OFF v t Nemerical display ON OFF gt DIGITAL Auto scroll ON OFF BAR GRAPH gt v Changing groups t Auto scroll ON OFF Changing groups Switching screens Group1 Group2 Group3 Group4 TREND DIGITAL BAR GRAPH lt gt a gt gt v lt gt a v Screen menu Sub menu DISP ENTER key 4V lt gt _ Arrow keys Procedure Displaying the screen Follow the procedures below when a different operation screen is being displayed 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 2 Select Trend Digital or Bar Graph using the up and down arrow keys 3 Pressing the
58. Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter 0 or 1 and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Note Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 5 5 sBuijes jauueyo jusweinseay 7 5 3 Digital Input DI Setting Explanation The following table shows the mode range and measurable range Mode Range Measurable Range DI Level 0 Less than 2 4 V 1 Greater than or equal to 2 4 V Contact 0 Opened 1 Closed 5 4 Difference Computation Delta Setting Procedure To measure the difference between the inputs of two channels follow the procedures below to set the input range The difference computation channel displays the computed result of the measured value of the difference computation channel the measured value of the reference channel Select the input type for the difference computation channel from DC voltage thermocouple RTD and ON OFF input The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move
59. Item Data Condition of Measurement Channels Displayed Value AVE When all data are measurement errors or over range Blank Average value MAX MIN e When all data are measurement errors Blank Maximum value over range 99999 minimum value over range 99999 SUM When all data are measurement errors or over Blank Sum value range When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 e Computation channel Item Data Condition of Computation Channels Displayed Value AVE When all data are computation errors or over range Blank Average value MAX MIN When all data are computation errors Blank Maximum value When the maximum value exceeds 99999999 999999999 minimum value When the minimum value is below 9999999 99999999 The decimal position that was specified when the span for the equation was specified is reflected in the maximum and minimum values For example if the span setting of the equation is 200 0 then 99999999 is output when the value exceeds 99999999 9 and 99999999 is output when the value is below 999999 9 SUM e When all data are computation errors or Blank Sum value computation overflow e When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 e When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 Storing to the Internal Memory and Saving to the External Storage
60. LCD The following display conditions of the LCD can be configured Screen Attribute Settings Background color operation screen You can select white or black for the background color of the of the screen The initial setting is white For the setting procedure see section 7 13 LCD brightness The brightness of the LCD can be set between eight levels The initial setting is 4 For the setting procedure see section 7 14 Backlight saver The lifetime of the LCD backlight can be extended by automatically dimming the light when there is no key operation for a certain amount of time The screen returns to the original brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence The initial setting is set so that the backlight saver is disabled For the setting procedure see section 7 14 1 4 Storage Function Acquiring Data to the Internal Memory Display data and event data The measured computed data are first acquired to the RD MV100 s internal memory as two types of data display data and event data Then the data are saved to the external storage medium automatically or when press MEDIA key You can select whether to save the measured computed data as display data event data or as both The capacity of the internal memory for acquiring display data and event data is 1 2 MB When the measured computed data are saved as both display data and event data 0 9 MB is used to save display data and 0 3 M
61. Medium Report data are stored to the internal memory at the end of each time interval The maximum number of report data files data set for each interval that can be stored in the internal memory is 40 For detail see chapter 8 11 24 11 12 Using the Report Function Starting Stopping the Report Function The report start stop is in sync with the data acquisition start stop The report can also be started or stopped via remote control or communication commands For the remote control function see section 10 9 For the communication function see RD MV100 Communication Interface User s Manual Procedure Starting the report also starts the data acquisition to the internal memory 1 Press the START key The icon that indicates the data acquisition to the internal memory turns to a start icon and the computation icon appears For details related to the status display section see section 4 2 The report function starts When the time to create the report arrives the report data are written to the internal memory Stopping the report also stops the data acquisition to the internal memory 1 Press the STOP key A confirmation window opens 2 Use the arrow keys to select Mem Math stop the data acquisition to the internal memory and computation or Mem stop the data acquisition and press the DISP ENTER key The icon that indicates the data acquisition to the internal memory turns to a stop icon and the computation icon
62. SEB ER SEE oer ORE OOOO Note The upper and lower limits of span cannot be set to the same value p Unit Set the unit Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a character string Enter the unit up to 6 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Note When computation is turned On Off or when equations and span settings are changed the alarm setting for that channel is turned OFF 11 11 uondo uonsuny Woday uonejndwog F 11 5 Setting the Alarm Procedure You can set up to 4 alarms on each computation channel The alarm types are upper limit alarm H lower limit alarm L delay upper limit alarm T and delay lower limit alarm t The hysteresis is fixed to 0 Note ___ When Math On Off is turn ON an entry box used to enter the equation is displayed and the alarm setting boxes are activated white color Set the alarm after setting the equation When computation is turned On Off or when equations and span settings are changed the alarm setting for that channel is turned OFF e These procedures are carried out in the setting mo
63. Update 1min 2min 5min 10min 20min30min 1h 2h 4h Rate div Speed of movement 594 297 119 59 30 20 10 5 2 5 approximate value mm h Note The speed of movement of the trend display along the time axis is derived from the following equation given the dot pitch of the LCD 0 33 mm The speed of movement of the trend display along the time axis 30 dots x 0 33 mm x 60 min display update rate min Measured and computed values are updated every second However when the scan interval on the RD MV106 RD MV112 is 2 s the display update rate is also 2 s 1 6 1 3 Display Function Displayed data The data displayed on the screen are a maximum and minimum values of the data that are sampled at the scan interval within the time period corresponding to one dot Displayed data of the waveform when the display update rate is set to one minute of Maximum value ee Minimum value 2 s 1 dot When the display update rate is set to one Tmin minute the time period corresponding to 1 division 30 dots nT sampling interval of displayed The time period corresponding to one dot is called the sampling interval of displayed data The sampling interval of displayed data is determined by the display update interval The relationship between the display update rate and the sampling interval of displayed data is as follows For the procedure related to setti
64. V 5 Dielectric strength 500 VDC for one minute between input terminals and earth ground terminal For details related to the control and input types see section 10 7 2 12 2 7 Power Supply Wiring This section describes how to connect the power supply cable Make sure to read this section before wiring the power supplly cables 100 to 120 VAC 200 to 240 VAC Power Supply Model A Precautions to be taken when wiring the power supply To prevent electric shock and damage to the recorder observe the following warnings Confirm that the supply voltage meets the rated power supply voltage before connecting the cable Confirm that the power is turned OFF before connecting the power cord To prevent electric shock and the possibility of fire use only the power cord that is supplied by Omega Always use protective earth terminal to prevent electric shock Connect the power cord to a three pole power outlet that has a protective earth terminal e Never use an extension cord that does not have protective earth terminal otherwise the protection function will be compromised Use a power supply that meets the following conditions Item Conditions Rated power supply 100 to 240 VAC Allowable power supply voltage range 90 to 132 or 180 to 264 VAC Rated power supply frequency 50 60 Hz Allowable power supply frequency range 50 60 Hz 2 Maximum power consumption 38 VA 100 V 53 VA 240 V Note Do not us
65. affecting all connected devices If you need to make a parallel connection then Turn the burnout function OFF See section 5 9 Ground the instruments to the same point Do not turn ON or OFF another instrument during operation This can have adverse effects on the other instruments RTDs cannot be wired in parallel 1 p102 4 oy Husn a10jog e 2 3 Input Signal Wiring To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF CAUTION e Do not apply input signals that exceed the following values This can damage the recorder e Maximum input voltage Voltage range of 2 VDC or less or thermocouples 10 VDC Voltage range between 6 and 20 VDC 30 VDC e Maximum common mode noise voltage 250 VACrms 50 60 Hz e This recorder is an INSTALLATION CATEGORY II product E eee SS Wiring Procedure 1 Turn OFF the recorder and remove the input terminal cover 2 Connect the input signal wires to the input terminals 3 Replace the input terminal cover and fasten it with screws Note The terminal block itself can be removed by loosening the two screws at the top left and bottom right of the terminal block This makes wiring work easier To prevent bad contacts make sure to securely tighten the screws after wiring Z N bg ots o z x J a Qe Loosen screw Loosen screw x
66. and event data The computed data from the computation channels can be acquired as the display data and event data in the same manner as for the measurement channels See chapter 8 Manual sampled data The instantaneous values of all computation channels excluding the computation channels that are turned Off can be stored to the internal memory with the manual sampling operation For the operating procedure see sections 8 12 TLOG data The TLOG computation data are acquired every interval For the setting procedure see sections 11 8 and 11 9 Setting Computation Channels The computation channel specifications are set in the setting mode For detail see sections 11 4 through 11 6 The timer used in the TLOG computation is set in the basic setting mode For detail see section 11 9 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog 11 2 Explanation of Computing Equations This section describes the meaning of the computation equation and how to write them Four Arithmetical Computations The types of data that can be used in equations are measurement channels computation channels constants KO1 to K12 communication interface data C01 to C12 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 EXAMPLE Addition 01 02 Computes the value of channel 1 plus the value of channel 2 Subtraction 01 02 Computes the value of channel 1 minus the value of channel 2 Multiplication x 01xK03 Computes the value of chan
67. and the current display data on the right half of the screen ios exxera 5 Current trend Historical trend display data only Current trend information SUONJOUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 1 3 Display Function Setting Screen The various functions of the RD MV100 are configured using the setting mode or the basic setting mode Setting mode screen This screen is used to set the input range filter moving average alarm group channel display color etc For details see section 3 5 e Setting screen example for the setting mode Alarm Reflash Off Relay AND ito Cursor blue Action Energize Behavior Nonhold Indicator Nonhold Rate of change Increase 1 Decrease 1 Hysteresis 0 141 162 101 103 None 101 T Parameter selections selected using the soft keys Basic setting mode screen This screen is used to configure the basic specifications of the various functions such as burnout reference junction compensation A D integration time and the method used to acquire data to the internal memory For details see section 3 5 e Setting screen example for the basic setting mode First CH Jar Last CH Jar Range Hode Range Span L Span_U Cursor blue firs 2y 2 000 2 088 piara Type Value Rly No 1 on H 1 000 On for 2 fon Lt 1 100 off 3 4 Parameter selections selected using the soft keys Setting the Display Conditions of the
68. area for writing the TLOG computed data of the internal memory When storing to the external storage medium the data are stored to the TLOG data file DTG extension For details related to the data acquisition of data to the internal memory and the storage to the external storage medium see the explanation on the TLOG data in chapter 8 Note TLOG data are written to the internal memory at the interval determined by the timer when the timer is specified see section 11 8 writing to the internal memory is carried out regardless of the setting specified in the above mentioned Action box 11 19 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog 11 10 Using the Rolling Average Procedure A rolling average can be specified as the moving average on the computed results of each computation channel Set the sampling interval and the number of samples The maximum sampling interval is 1 hour the maximum number of samples is 64 The rolling average can be used to suppress fluctuations in the computed results e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Twice press the s
69. arrow key INFOR E HATTON 3 Pps JUMP TO HISTORY 4 Select JUMP TO HISTORY using the up and down arrow keys 5 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the historical trend To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Displaying the report data option This operation is carried out on the Message Summary screen For detail of the report data see section 11 11 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen menu 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select REPORT DATA using the up and down arrow keys INFOR z MATION JUMP TO REPORT 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the report data To close the menu without displaying the report data press the ESC key Changing the report data to be displayed The index number of the report data currently displayed the number of report data sets in the internal memory is displayed in the Index column of the report data display The most recent report data set is the one with the largest report data index number When the report data are being displayed the arrow keys can be pressed to switch the report being displayed The operation when the four arrow keys are pressed are as follows Up arrow key Down arrow key Right arrow key Left arrow key Displays next report data Displays the previous report data Displays the report data that is 10 data sets afte
70. at the top or in the middle of a character string are also not allowed 2 Press the DISP ENTER key to save the data The saved file appears in the file list If a file with the same name as you entered exists on the external storage medium a message will appear to confirm overwriting Select Yes or No and press the DISP ENTER key ejeg BHuiziyeniuy pue saji4q Huibeueyy el 9 1 Saving Loading Setup Data Loading Setup Data In the Basic Setting Mode Procedure Loads the setup data set in both the setting mode and the basic Setting mode from a setup file in the external storage medium and make the settings effective Returns to the operation mode when loading is completed e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Press the softkey Next 1 3 Press soft key to display the Save Load Initialize menu screen 2 Press 2 soft key to display the Load settings screen Load settings File name Time SET1 PNL 2000 01 01 88 26 File list A PNL 2000 01 01 04 18 AAAG PNL 2000 01 02 00 53 SET2 PNL 2000 01 01 00 35 SAITO PNL 2000 01 15 63 27 KATSU PNL 1999 09 14 15 47 1 A list of setup files in the storage medium appears Select the file to be loaded The extension of setup files is PNL To cancel the operation and retu
71. burnt replace the TC Stop the TC burnout upscale downscale function of other equipment Ground the recorder and other equipment at the same grounding pole Disconnect parallel wiring Use a double element TC for instance Bunooyseaqnouy D Set correctly See section 5 9 12 9 12 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart Display and other functions do not work properly Separate the input and communication wiring from the noise source Ground the recorder properly Use shielded cables for input and communication wiring Insert an isolation transformer into the power line Insert a power line filter into the power line If an inductive load is connected to an alarm contact output use a surge suppresser on that line Is the input free of noise Contact Omega 12 10 Chapter 13 Maintenance 13 1 Periodic Maintenance Check the recorder operation periodically to keep the recorder in good working order Perform the following checks and replace worn parts as needed e Is the display and storage functioning properly In the event of problems see section 12 2 Has the brightness of the LCD backlight deteriorated If replacement is necessary see section 13 4 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts soueUD UIe 2 13 1 13 2 Replacing the Fuse Don t replace the fuses for 100 120 VCA 200 240 VCA power supply models by yourself For replacemen
72. bytes 6 x 4 bytes 25 000 When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length 25 000 data points x 1 s 25 000 s approx 7 hours 8 7 winipay abe10 sg jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eead e 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data Display data and event data Measurement channel 2 computation channel none Data Maximum Number of Data Points and Sampling Length Display data Maximum number of data points 900 000 2 CH x 4 bytes 0 x 8 bytes 112 500 However since 75 000 data points is the limit Maximum number of data points 75 000 Display rate When set to 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Sampling length 75 000 data points x 60 s 4 500 000 s approx 52 days Event data Maximum number of data points 300 000 2 CH x 2 bytes 0 x 4 bytes 75 000 However since 30 000 data points is the limit Maximum number of data points 30 000 data points When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length 30 000 data points x 1 s 30 000 s approx 8 hours Measurement channel 12 computation channel 6 Data Maximum Number of Data Points and Sampling Length Display data Maximum number of data points 900 000 12 CH x 4 bytes 6 x 8 bytes 9 375 Display rate When set to 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Sampling length 9 375 data points x 60 s 562 500 s approx 6 5 days Event data Maximum number of data points 30
73. can be set to white or black common to all screens The line width of the trend can be selected as 1 2 or 3 dots The line width of the trip line can be selected as 1 2 or 3 dots The grid lines can be displayed on the trend s waveform display area by dividing the display span into 4 to 12 sections The interval at which the displayed group is automatically switched on the trend digital and bar graph displays can be specified The displayed group rotates from group 1 to group 4 These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Press the soft key Next 13 Press the soft key os To display the setting screen press the soft key Oom l View Direction Trend Bargraph Vertical Background White Trend line 2 dot Trip line 2 dot Grid ia div Scroll time 5s NO obRWONM The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Set the display direction of the trend 1 Direction Trend Select horizontal or vertical Set the display direction of the bar graph 2 Direct
74. carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys e The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press ew Press the softkey Next 1 3 Press the soft key O Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key a Setting on a computation channel option To display the setting screen press the soft key O Color CH Color 1 7 Green 1 Blue B violet E PUN The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Channel display color Move the cursor to the desired channel and set the channel display color select from 16 colors Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Initial settings of channel display color Channel 1 Red Channel 2 Green Channel 3 Blue Channel 4 Blue violet Channel 5 Brown Channel 6 Orange Channel 7 Yellow green Channel 8 Light blue Channel 9 violet Channel 10 Gray Channel 11 Lime
75. connected applications MV100 Quick Reference This quick reference should be used as a supplement to the User s Manual M3641 1 Outline of key arrangement See Section 3 1 for key explanations ss 1 Soft keys 2 Menu Function and User keys 3 Start Stop keys 4 Operation key 5 Power switch A 2 Flow chart of setting Section 3 5 Soft Key UM Section gt 1 Range 5 1 to 5 7 Alarm 6 2 2 Tag 7 1 Filter 5 8 Alarm delay 6 3 3 Trend Save interval 7 3 8 8 4 Message 7 5 5 Display 7 6 to 7 11 6 File 8 9 DST 10 12 7 8 Save Load 5 1 Clear data 5 2 5 4 5 5 Setting mode Menu Operation screen Monitor display gt 1 Alarm 6 4 A D 5 9 2 Temperature 10 13 See _ gt 3 Memory 8 1 8 4 4 Memory amp Trend 8 10 8 11 Pa a 6 Key lock 10 4 7 Key login 10 6 Meni 8 Save 9 1V Load 9 1 Initialize 9 8 display 9 Options Remote 10 7 Report 11 13 10 Option Communication M3643 6 1 6 3 gt End Exit from SETUP mode 3 6 OMEGA MV100 Quick Reference 3 Flow chart of setting Range alarm and trend save interval setting Hard keys 3 Section 3 2 Soft keys Located just below the display Operation screen Monitor display Section 4 1 Press MENU Setting mode Menu display Section 3 6 Press Press Range Alarm Trend Save interval setting menu Setting me
76. control 1 With AC adapter 2 A1 A2 and A3 cannot be specified simultaneously 3 If F1 is specified A3 cannot be specified NO Instrument No When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the instrument please quote the instrument No Checking the Contents of the Package Standard Accessories The following standard accessories are supplied with the instrument Make sure that all items are present and undamaged 4 One of these power cord types is supplied according to the instrument s suffix code 6 One of these power cord types is supplied according to the suffix code A D SS UL CSA Standard F R VDE Standard SAA Standard GEN 11 Number Part Name Part Number Model Q ty Notes 1 Terminal screw 5 M4 2 Application MV10A 02 1 Included only when the language software code is 2 For Windows 95 98 NT 3 External storage A1053MP 1 Zip disk included only when the code medium for external storage medium is 2 A1134UN 1 ATA flash memory card included only when the code for external storage medium is 3 4 Power cord A1006WD 1 Provided only when 1 is specified for the power supply code A1009WD 1 Provided only when 1 is specified for the power supply code A1024WD 1 Provided only when 1 is specified for the power supply code A1023WD 1 Provided only when 1 is specified for the power supply code 5
77. digits rounded up where the multiplier scaling span digits measuring span digits Example Assuming that range 6V measuring span 1 000 to 5 000 V scaling span 0 000 to 2 000 Then Measuring accuracy 0 1 x 5 V 2 digits 0 005 V 5 digits 2 7 digits Multiplier 2000 digits 0 000 to 2 000 4000 digits 1 000 to 5 000 V 0 5 Accuracy during scaling 7 digits x 0 5 2 6 digits rounded up Reference junction compensation Internal External selectable for each channel Reference junction compensation accuracy above 0 C Types R S B W 1 C Types K J E T N L U 0 5 C Maximum allowable input voltage 10 V DC continuous for ranges of 2 V or less and TC ranges 30 V DC continuous for 6 V DC and 20 V DC ranges Input resistance Approximately 10 MQ or more for ranges of 2 V DC or less and TC Approximately 1 MQ for 6 V DC and 20 V DC ranges Input source resistance Volt TC 2 KQ or less RTD 10 or less per wire The resistance of all three wires must be equal Input bias current 10 nA or less Maximum common mode noise voltage 250 Vrms AC 50 60 Hz Maximum noise voltage between channels 250 Vrms AC 50 60 Hz Interference between channels 120 dB when the input source resistance is 500 and the inputs to other channels are 30 V Common mode rejection ratio 120 dB 50 60 Hz 0 1 500 imbalance between the minus terminal and ground Normal
78. disappears The report stops Note When the report function is stopped the report file is closed When the report is restarted data are written to a new file Clearing the Report Data in the Internal Memory These procedures are carried out in the setting mode The report data are cleared along with the display data for example For the procedures see section 9 7 11 25 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog 11 13 Setting the Report Function Set the report type report channels the time and date to create the report The report function is set in the basic setting mode Procedure e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Twice press the soft key Next 1 3 Press the soft key 9 To display the setting screen press the soft key Oon Report Report set ET 1 Date 1 2 Time o Report CH RI 4 On off On 5 Channel a a 6 Sum scale fs T The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Report set Hour Creates hourly reports
79. display the setting screen press the soft key ot l Alarm Reflash 1 Relay AND None 2 Action Energize _ 3 Behavior Nonhold _ 4 Indicator Nonhold 5 Rate of change Increase 1 7 6 Decrease 1 a Hysteresis On The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Setting reflash 1 Reflash Select On or Off On Use reflash function Off Not use reflash function Setting the AND OR logic of output relays 2 Relay AND Select the relays that are to use the AND logic Set the last relay that is to use the AND logic The relays beyond this relay will use the OR logic Select from None 101 101 only 101 102 101 and 102 and l01 106 101 to 106 The setting is valid for relays specified by options Setting the output relay operation energized de energized 3 Relay Action Select energize or de energize using the soft key Setting the output relay operation hold non hold 4 Relay Behavior Select hold or non hold using the soft key When the alarm output relay option is not installed these settings are void Setting the alarm indication operation hold non hold 5 Indicator Select hold or non hold using the soft key 6 10 6 4 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function Basic Setting Mode Explanation Setting the interval for the rate of change alarm 6 Rate of change Incre
80. divisions from 4 to 12 For bar graph display Only the main scale marks are displayed For trend display See the explanation Setting the bar graph s base position 3 Bar graph base position of the bar graph Select normal or center Note When the bar graph is displayed vertically see section 7 13 the base position is fixed to Normal the bottom of the bar graph is the base position Setting the scale position on the trend display 4 Scale position The Scale position is used to set the scale display position for each channel when the scale display is turned On see section 4 3 on the trend display Select the position from 1 to 6 Select Off for channels without scale Note The scale for the channels that are assigned to the group in the trend display are displayed The larger the number of scales to be displayed less amount of area there is to display the waveform Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 7 16 7 10 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend Explanation Scale Specifications Scale display position On the trend display the scale display position for the channels that are assigned to groups can be displayed i
81. e When the specified time is reached at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be enabled the recorder automatically sets the clock ahead by one hour Example If the time is set to 9 O clock on June 1 the time is set ahead to 10 O clock June 1 e When the specified time is reached at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be disabled the recorder automatically sets the clock back by one hour Example If the time is set to 9 O clock on December 1 the time is set back to 8 O clock December 1 For the setting procedure see section 10 12 The temperature unit can be set to Celsius C or Fahrenheit F This applies to all 8 4 and 8 5channels For the setting procedure see section 10 13 1 28 Chapter 2 Before Using the Recorder 2 1 Precautions on the Use of the Recorder Read the following precautions before using the recorder and the external storage medium floppy disk zip disk ATA flash memory card Handling Precautions Use care when cleaning the recorder especially any plastic parts When cleaning wipe with a dry soft cloth Do not use chemicals such as benzene or thinner since these may cause discoloring and deformation Keep electrically charged objects away from the instrument as this may cause malfunction Do not apply volatile chemicals to the LCD monitor or panel keys Do not allow rubber and vinyl products to remain in contact with the recorder for long periods of time T
82. every hour on the hour for hourly reports at the specified hour on the hour for daily reports once a day at the specified hour on the hour on the specified day for weekly reports once a week and at the specified hour on the hour on the specified date for monthly reports once a week For example in the case of daily reports the average maximum minimum and sum over a day for the specified channels are computed at the specified time on the hour and the results are acquired to the internal memory This constitutes one report data set The report data residing in the memory can be displayed on the RD MV100 s LCD see section 1 3 Display Function In addition the report data residing in the internal memory can be saved to an external storage medium section 1 4 Storage Function Because the report data are saved to the external storage medium in ASCII format spreadsheet applications can be used to view the data see appendix 2 Data Format of ASCII Files For details related to the report function see chapter 11 Item Description Report type Select from hourly reports only daily reports only daily and monthly reports and weekly and monthly reports Number of channels per report Up to 12 channels Computed data Average maximum minimum and sum Number of reports that can be Up to 40 acquired to the internal memory Data format ASCII format For a display example of report data se
83. language that is used on the screen The language setting applies to all modes operation mode setting mode and basic setting mode e The initial setting is English These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Press the soft key Next 1 3 To display the setting screen press the soft key AUX Tag Channel Channel Hemory alarm lh Language Partial Use The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Aux Language Select the language Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Range of screen elements that are displayed in the specified language English and Japanese are used on all the screens German and French are used on the following screens For other screens the displays will be the same as those for English Screen menu in the operation mode displaye
84. login function and batch information models with BT1 Display the logs of error messages key login logout communication interface commands and file transfers via FTP Display the number of input points capacity of the internal memory options and MAC address The LCD backlight automatically dims if no key is pressed for a certain preset time can be set from 1 2 5 10 20 and 60 minutes Selectable from English German French and Japanese German and French are used on the following screens For other screens the displays will be the same as those for English Screen menu in the operation mode FUNC key menu in the operation mode Error Messages Operation guide screens C or F selectable 14 4 14 3 Data Storage Specifications External storage medium Selectable from 1 3 5 inch floppy disk 2HD 1 44 MB 2 PCMCIA ATA flash memory card 4 to 160 MB 3 Zip disk 100 MB Saving method Manual or automatic selectable Manual saving Data saving by inserting external storage medium and pressing MEDIA key Automatic saving Display data Periodic saving 10 min to 31 days to external storage medium Event data In case of trigger free Periodic saving 3 min to 31 days to external storage medium In case of using trigger Save the data when data acquisition is finished Sampling Interval Display data Linked with the waveform display rate Event data Linked with the specified sampli
85. mode rejection ratio 40 dB 50 60 Hz 0 1 14 14 14 7 General Specifications Power Supply Rated power supply 100 to 240 VAC automatic switching 12 VDC AC for 12 VDC power supply model Allowable power supply voltage range 90 to 132 or 180 to 264 VAC 10 to 18 VDC for 12 VDC power supply model Rated power supply frequency 50 60 Hz automatic switching for AC Rated Power consumption 53 VA except for P1 model 30 VA for 12 VDC power supply model Power consumption Supply Voltage Backlight Saving Mode Normal 100 VAC 17 VA 20 VA 240 VAC 26 VA 30 VA 12 VDC 10VA 11VA Normal Operating Conditions Effects of Operating Conditions Power supply voltage 90 to 132 or 180 to 250 VAC 10 to 18 VDC for 12 VDC power supply model Power supply frequency 50 Hz 2 60 Hz 2 Ambient temperature O to 50 C when using FDD or Zip drive 5 to 40 C Ambient humidity 20 to 80 RH at 5 to 40 C Vibration 10 to 60 Hz 0 2 m s or less Shock Not acceptable Magnetic field 400 A m or less DC and 50 60 Hz Noise Normal mode 50 60 Hz Volt The peak value including the signal must be less than 1 2 times the measuring range TC The peak value including the signal must be less than 1 2 times the measuring thermal electromotive force RTD 50 mV or less Common mode noise 50 60 Hz 250 Vrms AC or less for all ranges Maximum noise voltage between channels 50 60 Hz 250 V
86. movement of the trend along the time axis The following table shows the display rate display data sampling interval and the speed of movement of the trend along the time axis Display Rate DIV 1min 2min 5min 10min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h Display data 2 4 10 20 40 60 120 240 480 sampling interval s Speed of movement of the 594 297 119 59 30 20 10 5 25 trend Estimated value mm h 7 3 Aejdsig y Buneiado pue Huas 7 4 Using Message Strings Trend Procedure Arbitrary character strings can be registered They can be displayed on the trend display and stored along with the display event data e Number of messages 8 e Number of characters Up to 16 alphanumeric characters A list of messages can be displayed on the message summary screen See section 4 5 For models with the batch function BT1 option messages 1 2 and 3 can be altered from the operation screen to be used Displaying a message on the trend display writing a message to the internal memory This operation is carried out in the operation mode 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft keys 2 Press the Message soft key Eight soft keys for the messages and a window containing a list of messages are displayed 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the message you wish to display A message mark time and the message are displayed on the trend display a Hessage list Hessagel POWER ON Nessage2 POWER OFF Hessage3
87. output relay with an alarm ACK operation output relay hold function 1 19 1 6 Computation Function and Report Function M1 Option Computing equations are assigned to channels that are dedicated to performing computations Displaying computation channels and acquiring computed data can be carried out in the same manner as in the measurement channels The computation is performed every scan interval Reports can be created displayed and stored Report channels and report types are set in the basic setting mode For detail see Chapter 11 Computation Channels Model Channel RD MV102 Channels 31 to 34 RD MV104 Channels 31 to 34 RD MV106 Channels 31 to 42 RD MV112 Channels 31 to 42 4 channels 4 channels 12 channels 12 channels Types of Computations The following types of computations can be performed Type Description Four arithmetical operations Addition subtraction multiplication x and division SQR Computes the square root ABS Determines the absolute value LOG Determines the common logarithm EXP Determines the exponent Relational computation Determines lt lt gt 2 and outputs 0 or 1 Logical computation Determines the AND logical product OR logical sum XOR exclusive logical sum of two channels NOT negation of an arbitrary channel and outputs 0 or 1 Statistical computation TLOG
88. per screen maximum Number of group screens 4 Display update rate 1 s 2 s when the scan interval is 2 s Contents Numerical value unit alarm indication Automatic display switching Overview screen Information screen Tags Historical trend screen Log display System screen Backlight saver function Display language Temperature unit The displayed group can be automatically changed on the trend digital and bar graph displays The display switching interval is selectable from 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s and 1 min Number of indication channels Measured values and alarm status of all channels Alarm summary Displays the list of alarms Capable to switch to historical trend screen by cursor pointing Message summary Display the list of messages and time Capable to switch to historical trend screen by cursor pointing Memory summary Display the file list in internal memory Capable to switch to historical trend screen by cursor pointing Number of characters 16 characters maximum Display the retrieved data from internal or external memory Display format Whole screen display or divided into 2 areas Time axis operation Can be expanded reduced and scrolled Memory information The following information of the retrieved data are displaye File name serial number of the RD MV which is used to acquire data starting and ending time of data acquisition user name when using key
89. right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key AM TREND GROUP 1 EH DIGITAL GROUP 1 ul sar gt GROUP 1 TE 2 m 7 4 Select the group using the up and down arrow keys 5 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key 4 5 su 1995 uopes do BulyosywMs gt 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Displaying or clearing the scale on the trend screen This operation is carried out on the Trend screen il 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen menu Trend is selected Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key Select SCALE ON or SCALE OFF The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu ALL CHANNEL SCALE OFF r INFOR p DIGITAL OFF E gt MATION JAUTO SCROLL ON e pn TREND HISTORY Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the scale To close the menu without displaying clearing the scale press the ESC key Displaying all channel trend Return to group channel trend This operation is carried out on the Trend screen All channel trend displays waveforms of all channels set for Trend screen See section 8 10 to set channels for Trend screen 1 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu Trend is selected Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub me
90. span upper limit cannot be set to the same value Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 5 1 sBuijes jauueyo jueweinseay 7 5 1 Voltage Input Setting Explanation The following table shows the mode range and measurable range Mode Range Measurable Range Volt 20 mV 20 00 to 20 00 mV 60 mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200 mV 200 0 to 200 0 mV 2V 2 000 to 2 000 V 6V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20 V 20 00 to 20 00 V DC current input An external shunt resistor is connected to the input terminal to convert a current signal to a voltage signal The shunt resistors in the following table can be provided A 250 Q shunt resistor for example is used to convert a 4 to 20 mA to a 1 to 5 V Name Model Part Number Specification Shunt resistors 415920 250 Q 0 1 for screw terminals 415921 100 Q 40 1 415922 10 Q 40 1 Shunt resistors 438920 250 Q 0 1 for clamped terminals 438921 100 Q 0 1 438922 10 Q 40 1 5 2 Thermocouple TC Resistance Temperature Detector RTD Setting Procedure To measure TC and RTD signals follow the procedures below to set the input range The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress These procedures are carried out in t
91. string Initial setting is all space Moving average Count 4 RD MV106 RD MV112 8 12 16 Filter 10s RD MV102 RD MV104 Alarm delay time Numerical value Trend Save Time div 10 min interval 2h Aute save interval Up to other parameters set Message Characters No 1 to No 8 Character string Initial setting is all space File Header Character string Initial setting is all space Directory name Character string Initial setting is DATA 0 Save data Unsave xipueddy z Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Group set Group number 1 2 3 4 Fixed Group name Character string CH set See section 7 6 for initial settings Trip line On Off On Position Numerical value Color Red Green Blue B violet Initial values are No 1 Red Brown Orange Y green Lightblue hea reen No 3 Blues Violet Gray Lime Cyan Darkblue Yellow Lightgray Purple Color CH1 to CH12 Red Green Blue B violet See section 14 2 for initial settings Brown Orange Y green Lightblue Violet Gray Lime Cyan Darkblue Yellow Lightgray Purple Zone Lower fto 95 Numerical value Upper 5 to 100 Graph Division 4 5 6 7 8 9 ott 12 Bar graph Normal Center Scale posit
92. the AC adapter to the AC adapter jack on RD MV100 Install the clamp filter standard accessory near RD MV100 of power cord 3 Connect the power cord plug that came with the AC adapter to the power supply connector of the AC adapter 4 Connect the plug on the other end of the power cord to a power outlet meeting the following specifications The power outlet should be a three pole type with a protective grounding terminal Rated power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC Operating supply voltage range 90 to 250 VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Maximum power consumption 90 VA AC adapter rated output voltage 12 VDC AC adapter maximum rated output current 2 6 A Functional grounding When using the AC adapter noise may be reduced if the functional ground is connected to the earth GND Use the functional ground terminal as necessary 2 14 2 7 Power Supply Wiring Using the accessory DC power terminal connector Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument Connect the power wires after checking that the power supply is turned off to prevent electric shock To prevent fire use wires with cross sectional area of 0 3mm2 22AWG or more Connecting procedure 1 Check thst the power switch is turned off 2 Connect the accessory DC power terminal connector part No A1105JC to the power wire and the DC100 DS400 DS600 Use a power wire with a cross sectional area of 0 3 mm 22
93. the Display Event Data Acquisition Basic Setting Mode Procedure Set the method of the display event data acquisition These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press mew Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key O8 l Hemory Save uto Data EHD D 2 Event Sample rate ls 3 Hode Trigger 4 Block 1 5 Data length ih M Pre Trigger o E 7 Trigger Key On 7 External Off 8 Alarm Off am The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Data save to the external storage medium 1 Save Set save method to the external storage medium Select Auto or Manual Auto auto save Manual manual save Note If Manual manual save is selected in step 1 set whether to save all the data in the internal memory or only the data that have not been saved when the storage medium is inserted into the drive and the front cover is closed See section 8 9 Data acquisition Acquiring only the display data 2 Data Select Display Note
94. the External Storage Medium eecceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeteneeeeeeseneeennees 3 5 3 4 RUN MOE 1 eeeeeeseeeseeeesceseneessceteaeeesaeeeaeessaeeeaeeseaeessaeeeseeseaeeeaneseaeessaeceaeeseaeessaeseeeseasenaees 3 7 3 5 Configuring the FUNCHONS 2 ccccsccccccssccccsectssaceatscaccecceceassssecascesadastesasasedeassacncstasssaitzacies 3 10 3 6 Common Key Operations issirinko E EEEE 3 19 3 7 Setting the Date and TIME ss evisccsvextssztesedscceesces eea EEN EEAS 3 23 Switching Operation Screens 4 1 Operation Screens aenaran a ETET SEES 4 1 4 2 Explanation of the Status Display SectiON nisiseme 4 2 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens 0 cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 5 4 4 Using the OverviGW Sree sirist tisi itiriasips tiaa vtec nd eedit 4 11 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and MEMORY SUmmMaArV sereset anaa a R a aa a aaRS 4 13 4 6 Using the Historical TENAS ne ERENS 4 18 Measurement Channel Settings 5 1 Voltage INPUT Setting i scie ccsags ceeds sda chvecigsenesatey ct cencev cotbecny veteedscn eg iteede ua dieetigsdedateteiecedovieants 5 1 5 2 Thermocouple TC Resistance Temperature Detector RTD Setting eee 5 3 5 3 Digital Input DI Setting 0 eee cece ceneeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeseeseaeeseaeeseeeseaeeseaeeseeeseeseneeeaees 5 5 5 4 Difference Computation Delta Setting rrisin ninsori einai paasa 5 7 55 Sealing Setting osoin e a eagiessacmcch
95. the MENU key MENU key Used to enter the setting mode Also used to return to the operation mode from the setting mode This function is the same as the ESC key 3 1 suoneiado uowwog 2poN UNY S 1edg JO SEWeN 7 3 1 Names of Parts and Functions 8 MEDIA key Detects the external storage medium and saves internal memory data to the external storage medium 9 FUNC key Used to execute various functions in the operation mode Also used to enter the basic setting mode from the setting mode 10 Soft keys When the FUNC key is pressed the functions are assigned to the soft keys and displayed at the bottom of the screen During the setting basic setting modes the parameters are assigned to the soft keys and displayed at the bottom of the screen with floppy disk drive with Zip drive with ATA flash memory card drive i iS iS CMcaoap m a amam amam am amam am COoebl o Oo e o Oo 6 C I T l 14 12 13 12 13 12 13 12 13 14 Power switch Used to turn the power ON OFF Storage medium drive Floppy disk drive Zip drive or ATA flash memory card drive depending on the specification Eject button access lamp for Zip drive Used when ejecting the storage medium Also is the access lamp for the Zip drive The access lamp is lit while the Zip disk is being accessed
96. the above figure 1 Group number Select the group number 1 to 4 2 Group name Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the group name Enter the group name up to 16 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 3 CHset Assign measurement channels to groups Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the channel number to be assigned Enter the channel number according to the following rules and press the DISP ENTER key Enter the channel number using two digits Separate each channel with a period Consecutive channels can be specified using a hyphen Example To set CH1 CH3 CH5 to CH8 to a particular group 01 03 05 08 is entered 7 8 7 6 Setting Groups Explanation For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Note The channels are displayed in the order they are specified on the trend digital bar graph displays One channel can be assigned to multiple groups Achannel cannot be assigned twice in the same group Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key The initial settings of the group
97. the internal memory that is used for data storage is 1 2 MB The internal memory is allocated depending on the acquired data as follows Data being Acquired Internal Memory Capacity Display data only 1 2 MB Display data and event data Display data 0 9 MB Event data 0 3 MB Event data only 1 2 MB 8 6 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data Maximum number of data points per channel that can be acquired The following table shows the maximum number of data points per channel that can be acquired Data being Acquired Maximum Number of Data Points Per Channel Display data only 1 200 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 4 number of computation channels x 8 Except the maximum number of data points is 100 000 Display data and event data Display data 900 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 4 number of computation channels x 8 Except the maximum number of data points is 75 000 Event data 300 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 Except the maximum number of data points is 30 000 Event data only 1 200 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 Except the maximum number of data points is 120 000 Sampling length The sampling length can be derived from the following equation Sampling length the maximum number of data points per channel x sampling interval Calculation e
98. the user name to be registered Press the DISP ENTER key to register the user name e For models with the batch function BT1 option e lf the user name already exists an error message This username is already registered is displayed The user name entry box stays yellow and the user name is not registered Change the user name to be registered e If the combination of the user ID and password already exists an error message Duplicate used combination of user ID and password is displayed Change the combination of the user ID and password to be registered To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 10 7 10 5 Displaying the Log Screen System Screen Procedure Explanation The following list is displayed on the log screen e Error messages the newest 50 e A record of key login logout the newest 50 e A record of communication commands the newest 200 A record of file transfers made using the FTP client function the newest 50 If the number exceeds the limit entries are deleted starting with the oldest one The number of input points capacity of the internal memory options and MAC address of the RD MV100 can be displayed on the screen for confirmation The log screen will be displayed in English regardless the language set for the recorder Display the log screen 1 Press the F
99. trend horizontal display The scale display position is 6 5 4 3 2 and 1 from the left Imin div TS TET STITT CANELA ay Ry TTT T 01 02 a1 q Imin div N P SAA ETE TT ETT Mp 5 ES 01 00 01 02 Bar Base Position Aejdsig y Buneiado pue Huas 8 843 a5 ls Bar base position normal Se 2 500 L 8 843 mA 9 00 200 90 5 a irae 167 57 3 500 3 500 4 m Bar base position center a a L 8 844 The base position is at the m _ center 50 of the display span 7 19 7 11 Using Partial Expansion Display Trend Procedure By compressing a section of the display scale of the measured computed data the remaining section of the display is expanded For detail see section 1 3 To use the partial expansion display first set the partial expansion display to Use in the basic setting mode This will display a partial expansion display setting box in the setting mode see section 7 12 e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys e The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press Pr
100. wnp n 6e e10 s jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eead e 8 12 Storing Measured Computed Data at Arbitrary Times Manual Sampling The instantaneous values of all measurement and computation channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off can be stored to the internal memory with a key operation Computation channels are options See section 8 3 Procedure This operation is carried out in the operation mode 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Manual sample soft key The instantaneous values of all channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off are stored to the internal memory sample C Note The manual sampling can also be carried out via remote control or communication commands 8 26 Chapter 9 Managing Files and Initializing Data 9 1 Saving Loading Setup Data You can save the setup data to or load setup data from the external storage medium The operation can be carried out in both the setting mode and the basic setting mode A setup data file has approximately 25 KB in size maximum Saving Setup Data In the Setting Mode Saves the setup data set in both the setting mode and the basic setting mode to the external storage medium The function is the same as that in the basic setting mode Procedure These procedures are carrie
101. 0 000 12 CH x 2 bytes 6 x 4 bytes 6 250 When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length 6 250 data points x 1 s 6 250 s approx 1 7 hours 8 3 Function to Acquire Other Data Manual Sampled Data When the manual sample key is pressed the instantaneous values of all channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off are acquired Up to 50 data sets can be stored in the internal memory When this number is exceeded data are overwritten from the oldest data Note The number of manual sampled data in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary Section 4 5 TLOG Data Option TLOG data are acquired at each time interval set by timers Up to 400 data sets can be stored in the internal memory When this number is exceeded data are overwritten from the oldest data Note e Upto 16 TLOG files number of start and stop can be stored to the internal memory When the number of files in the internal memory exceeds 16 TLOG data are overwritten even if the number of data sets is less than 400 The number of TLOG data sets in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary gt Section 4 5 Report Data Option e Report data are acquired at each time interval one hour for hourly report one day for daily report etc Up to 40 data sets can be stored in the internal memory When this nu
102. 00 0 to 300 0 C CU10 Q a 0 00392 at 20 C CU6 200 0 to 300 0 C CU10 Q a 0 00393 at 20 C CU25 200 0 to 300 0 C CU25 Q a 0 00425 at 0 C Cu1 to 6 and Cu25 are options For the setting procedure of the reference junction compensation and the burnout for the thermocouple input see section 5 9 5 3 Digital Input DI Setting Procedure To measure the digital input ON OFF input follow the procedures below to set the input range The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w To display the setting screen press the soft key oa l 1 First CH fal Last cH far Range Mode Range Span L Span U in a 1 2 3 4 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 2 Mode Set the mode to DI 3 Range Select Level or Cont Contact 4 Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the
103. 00 01 05 10 The date and time when the message was entered and the user name when using key login function are displayed Memory summary Number of data sets in the internal memory The maximum number of data sets the internal memory can hold Date and time the last data were acquired Status of alarm output relays MSAFE DATA coa raw o ooooon Red Activated TLOS DATA e0040 REPORT DATA 01 40 Jan 09 01 08 23 Green Released SAPE DATA DISPLAY DATA Selection of the file type to be Start Tire Erd Time Data Factor mb Jn 09 01 10 38 Jan 09 01 14 02 103 Sarlins displayed display data files or aaa event data files Jan 8 23 25 08 Jan G9 00 25 02 1768 Stoe Jan 08 23 23 38 Jan 08 23 23 50 7 Stor I TI j T Date and time the data File status acquisition ended Number of data in the file Date and time the data acquisition started 4 16 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Report data option The index number of the report data currently displayed The number of report data sets in the internal memory Report type Index 2 2 ChUnit Sts a1 y ay By ci Kind Hourly Start Jan 89 2000 01 10 36 Timeup Jan 09 2000 01 15 31 Ave Max Hin Sum 0 0 1 522 1 131 2 73546E 01 0 0g 1 55 1 131 2 74178E 01 0 03 1 522 52 1 131 2 73610E 01 00 44 1 56354564 2 8 L70 Date and time th
104. 12 14 Jan 3 01 12 25 es 1H Jan 9 01 11 07 Jan 9 01 11 09 es 1H Jan 9 01 10 58 Jan 9 61 11 65 ei 1H Jan 9 01 10 54 Jan 3 01 11 24 1 A Jan 9 01 10 03 Jan 9 01 10 18 l Mark Alarm Information Indicator Hold Non Hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Displays alarm information Mark Red Released Mark Green Hold Activated Displays alarm infomration Mark Blinks in red Stops blinking with alarm ACK Released Mark Blinks in green Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm output relay When the alarm indication is set to non hold alarm ACK does not work Relay Hold Non Hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Active Released Idle Hold Activated Active temporarily suspend with alarm ACK Released Idle with alarm ACK Alarm Alarm output relay Non hold Activated Released Activated Released Hold Alarm ACK When the alarm output relay is set to non hold alarm ACK does not work Alarm ACK or 6 4 6 2 Alarm Setting Procedure Note Press To display the setting screen press the soft key owt This section describes the procedures related to setting the alarm specification on each channel The auxiliary alarm function are set in the basic setting mode See section 6 4 Set the measurement range before setting the alarm All of the alarm settings of a channel a
105. 13 3 5 Configuring the Functions File Management and Data Clearing Operations related to the internal memory Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Initialization of Clear measured computed data Initialize settings basic settingsettings data clearing in the internal memory 9 7 mode setting mode and clear measured computed data in the internal memory 9 8 Management of files on the external storage media Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode File management Save setup data 9 1 Save setup data 9 1 Load setup data 9 1 Load setup data 9 1 Save measured data with key Delete files 9 5 operation 9 2 Format external storage media 9 5 Load display display data 9 3 Load display event data 9 4 List filesz 9 5 Delete files 9 5 Format external storage media 9 5 The Menu Screen and Items of the Setting Mode The menu screen and items of the setting mode are as follows Enclosed in parentheses are reference sections Math sett Math set2 Math set3 are displayed when the computational function M1 is equipped Set mode at Range Alarm a Tag Moving average Alarm Delay Time Ea Trend Save interval Hessage Set mode Poy Display To Display menu on the next page ie File DST Save Loed Clear data To Save Load Clear data menu on the next page 3 5 Configuring the Functions
106. 1740 Jan 09 01 08 20 Green Released SAPE paul SDE Oa ERA Selection of the file type to be ime im a actor a gt an8 ALSE JaneB ONIO 193 Sela aha rs data files or bat 76 ls 103 ti Janes 00 27 56 Janes 00 58 40 923 Roe event qata Mes Jan 08 23 26 08 Jan 09 00 25 02 1768 Stoe Jan 08 23 23 38 Jan 8 23 23 50 7 Stoe File status T Date and time the data acquisition ended Number of data in the file Date and time the data acquisition started Note For models with the batch function BT1 option a batch number and lot number can be displayed in place of the date and time when the data acquisition ended 1 3 Display Function Report Data M1 Option Historical Trend Report data residing in the internal memory can be displayed The report function is used to write the average minimum maximum and sum at specified intervals for the specified channels Reports can be made hourly daily weekly or monthly For details related to the report data see section 1 6 For the operating procedure see section 4 5 The index number of the report data currently displayed The number of report data sets in the internal memory Report type Index 2 2 Kind Hourly Start Jan 9 2008 01 14 36 __ ___ Date and time the report started _Timeup Jan 89 2000 01 15 31 T Date and time the report was created ChUnit Sts Ave Hax in Sum i y 6 033 1 522 1 131 2 7354886401 ay
107. 1770 0 C over range occurs If the input signal falls below approximately 10 0 C over range occurs For computation channels computation overflow when the value exceeds 3 4E 38 O computation overflow when the value falls below 3 4E 38 O App 10 Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Measurement computation errors are discarded when MAX and MIN are determined Measurement computation errors over range and computation overflow are discarded when determining AVE and SUM The report output values of AVE MAX MIN and SUM vary depending on the data condition of the measurement and computation channels as shown in the table below Item Data Condition of Measurement Channels Report Output Value AVE When all data are measurement errors or over range Blank Average value MAX MIN When all data are measurement errors Blank Maximum value over range 99999 minimum value over range 99999 SUM When all data are measurement errors or over Blank Sum value range When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 Item Data Condition of Computation Channels Report Output Value AVE When all data are computation errors or over range Blank Average value MAX MIN When all data are computation errors Blank Maximum value e When the maximum value exceeds 99999999 999999999 minimum value When the min
108. 2 0 DATA22 TRASH For models with the batch function BT1 option press the Time soft key when displaying the date and time of file creation and the Batch soft key when displaying the batch number and lot number 1 The directories in the external storage medium are displayed in the Directory name column Press the up or down arrow key to select the directory containing the event data to be loaded A list of files in the selected directory is displayed in the right column Root directory is denoted by 2 Press the right arrow key to move the cursor on to the file list Press the up or arrow key to select the event data file to be loaded To move back to the Directory name column press the left arrow key 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the waveform on the historical trend screen To return to the Save Load Clear data menu screen without displaying the historical trend press the ESC key e eg BHuiziyeniuy pue saji4q Huibeuey el 9 5 Managing Files Displaying Free Space on the External Storage Medium Displays a list of files and the amount of free space on the external storage medium in the setting mode only Deletes files and directories on the external storage medium Formats the external storage medium Display the List of Files and the Free Space on the External Storage Medium In the Setting Mode Procedure A list of files on the external storage medium can be dis
109. 4 Operation Errors Errors Related to External Storage Medium Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref Section 200 Operation aborted because an error was found in media See Communication Interface User s Manual 201 Not enough free space on media Use another storage medium 202 Media is read only Release the write protection 210 Media has not been inserted Insert a storage medium into the drive 211 Media is damaged or not formatted Use another storage medium or carry out formatting 212 Format error Try formatting again or use another storage medium 213 The file is read only Access to other files or make the file write enable 214 There is no file or directory See Communication Interface User s Manual 215 Exceeded the allowable number of files Delete files or change storage medium 216 The file or directory name is incorrect See sections 8 9 and 9 1 217 Unknown file type Access to other files 218 Directory exists Delete the directory or change directory name See section 8 9 219 Invalid file or directory operation Cannot handle files and directories in the 2nd and deeper layers 220 The file is already in use Try again later Wait till file is free 230 There is no setting file Access to other files 231 Abnormal setting exists in file Access to other files Errors Related to Historical Trend Code Message Explanation Counterm
110. 643 and M3644 Chapter Title and Contents 1 Overview of Functions Describes the functions of the recorder Before Using the Recorder Describes the installation and wiring procedures Names of Parts Run Mode Common Operations Describes the names of each part of the recorder how to use the storage medium drive run mode and common key operations Switching Operation Screens Describes how to use the operation screen such as the trend display and digital display Describes the operations that can be performed using the arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key on the front panel Measurement Channel Settings Describes how to set input specifications such as the range filter moving average scan interval integration time of the A D converter burnout and reference junction compensation Acknowledging and Setting Alarms Describes how to acknowledge alarms and how to set alarms Setting and Operating the Display Describes how to set the display specification of the operation screen how to display messages and other display related operations Data acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium Describes how to acquire the measured computed data and how to save the data to the external storage medium Managing Files and Initializing Data Describes how to save and load the setup data manage files on the external storage medium save the data residing in the internal memory to the external storag
111. 8 095 1 525 1 131 2 74178E 01 Bu 8 893 1 522 1 2 73610E 01 oF 52 91 2 70 89 44 1 5655456404 J Status of data See section 11 11 The display data and event data of the measured computed data stored in the internal memory or external storage medium are displayed as a historical trend For details related to the display data see Trend Display in this section For details related to the event data see section 1 4 Alarms and scales are not displayed on the historical trend display Methods used to display the historical trend e The following four methods are available in displaying the historical trend of the display data or event data in the internal memory e Display from the alarm summary For the operating procedure see section 4 5 e Display from the message summary For the operating procedure see section 4 5 e Display from the memory summary For the operating procedure see section 4 5 e Recall from the screen menu For the operating procedure see section 4 6 e For methods used to display the historical trend of display data or event data in the external storage medium see section 9 3 and 9 4 Information displayed on the historical trend The displayed information shown below is common to the historical trend of display data and event data Time axis oe Zoom factor of f Icons for switching screens the time axis Reference position 2 wm Tag Channel 6 968 x 0 8 0 0
112. AC adapter B9230ZW 1 Provided only when power supply code is 2 6 Power cord for 1 AC adapter 7 DC power supply A1105JC 1 Provided only when power supply ternial connector code is 2 8 Fuse A1352EF 1 250 V 4A time lag for 12 VDC power supply model 9 User s Manual M3641 1 This manual 10 User s Manual M3643 1 Communication function 11 User s Manual M3645 Application software Checking the Contents of the Package Optional Accessories Sold Separately The following optional accessories are available for purchase separately If you make an order make sure that all items are present and undamaged For information about ordering accessories contact the dealer from which you purchased the recorder Number Part Name Part Number Model Q ty Notes 1 3 5 floppy disk 7059 00 10 2HD 2 Zip disk A1053MP 1 100 MB 3 ATA flash memory card A1134UN 1 20 MB 4 Shunt resistor 4159 20 1 250 2 40 1 for the screw terminal 4159 21 1 100 Q 0 1 4159 22 1 10 2 0 1 5 Shunt resistor 4389 20 1 250 Q 40 1 for the clamp input terminal 4389 21 1 100 Q 0 1 4389 22 1 10 Q 40 1 6 Fuse A1352EF 4 250 V 4 A time lag for 12 VDC power supply model vi How to Use this Manual Structure of the Manual This User s Manual consists of the following 14 chapters an appendix and an index For information about the communication functions and the standard software see the respective manuals M3
113. AWG or more Install the clamp filter standard accessory near DC100 of power wire Soldering 0 VDC 10 to 18 VDC Rated supply voltage 12 VDC Operating supply voltage 10 to 18 VDC Power consumption About 30 VA max 2 15 Jep109ey oy Husn a10jog e Chapter 3 Names of Parts Run Mode Common Operations 3 1 Names of Parts and Functions Front Panel LCD screen Displays various operation screens such as the trend display and the setup screen to configure the recorder DISP ENTER key Displays and confirms the settings for switching screens in the operation mode Arrow keys Used to select the screen in the operation mode and to select the parameter START key Used to start the data acquisition to the internal memory and display the waveform on the trend display Also starts computation and the report function when the computation function M1 is equipped STOP key Used to stop the data acquisition to the internal memory It also stops the updating of the waveform on the trend display If the model has the optional computation function M1 the report is stopped For computation you can select whether or not to stop the operation when the STOP key is pressed ESC key Used to cancel an operation Also used to return to the operation mode from the setting mode This function is the same as
114. B is used to save event data SUOIJOUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 RD MV100 ee Internal memory a Display data only Event data only Display data and event data 1 2MB 1 2MB 0 9MB oe Display data Event data Display data are used to display waveforms on the RD MV100 s screen Display data consists of maximum and minimum values of the measured or computed data sampled at the scan interval within the time period corresponding to one dot on the time axis on the screen Display data can be likened to the conventional recording on the chart sheet and are useful for long term observations Event data are instantaneous values of the measured computed data at specified sampling intervals of the event data By setting the sampling interval equal to the scan interval all measured or computed data sampled at the scan interval can be saved In addition the event data generated when an event occurs an alarm for example can also be saved This is useful when you wish to observe the measured computed data in detail Display data Event data The time period corresponding to one dot on the screen Display data Measurement data e Event data Scan interval gt Sampling inteval for event data 1 4 Storage Function Manual sampled data Every time a given key operation is carried out all measured computed data instantaneous values at that point are acquired to the internal memory However this excl
115. Displaying the alarm summary message summary or memory summary 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen menu 2 Select INFORMATION using the up and down arrow keys 3 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 4 Select ALARM SUMMARY MESSAGE SUMMARY or MEMORY SUMMARY using the up and down arrow keys Rg INFOR za INFOR ALARM SUMMARY 9 MATION N o HATION Phyo Py 5 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without displaying the screen press the ESC key z INFOR ai MATION PEPI MEMORY SUMMARY Recalling the historical trend at the time the alarm occurred This operation is carried out on the Alarm Summary screen 1 Select the alarm of which to display the trend using the up and down arrow keys 006 006 Charnel Tyee Alarm IN Time Alam QUT Time _ e1 1H Jan 9 01 13 13 Jan G9 01 13 33 Selected alarm 1 A Jan 9 01 12 14 Jan 09 01 12 25 es 1H Jan 9 01 11 07 Jan 9 01 11 09 es 1H Jan 9 01 10 58 Jan 9 01 11 05 1 1H Jan 9 01 10 54 Jan 9 01 11 24 1 Jan 09 01 10 03 Jan G9 01 10 18 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen menu 3 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 4 Select JUMP TO HISTORY using the up and down arrow keys izo INFOR Pdi MATION FEP JUMP TO HISTORY 4 13 su
116. F using the up and down arrow keys The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu fw TREND gt ZES DIGITAL gt GROUP 1 GROUP 2 SCALE OFF FE INFOR gt DIGITAL OFF MATION AUTO SCROLL ON zn TREND Zeen TREND HISTORY F 7 HISTORY kE INFOR aep FEE MATION gt GROUP 4 TREND AUTO SCROLL ON gt HISTORY AUTO SCROLL ON 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to enable or disable the automatic switching of the displayed groups Switching the trend digital and bar graph screens The following two methods are available e Switch between trend digital and bar graph from the screen menu The operating procedure is the same as Displaying the screen on page 4 5 e Switching the trend digital and bar graph screens using the arrow keys 1 The displayed screen changes in the order trend digital bar graph trend and so on by pressing the down arrow key on the trend digital and bar graph screens 2 By pressing the up arrow key the displayed screen changes in the reverse order Starting the waveform display of the trend display stopping the waveform update The operation procedure used to start the waveform display of the trend display and the procedure used to stop the waveform update are the same as the operation used to start stop the data acquisition to the internal memory When the data are being acquired to the internal memory the waveform is displayed When it is stopped the waveform is not updat
117. Hath Free Write memory Free Message Manual sampled Nedia Free 1 Use Not The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Use Not Select Use or Not If Use is selected various parameters are displayed Use Use key lock Not Do not use key lock 2 Password Set the password used to release the key lock in the operation mode Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string up to 6 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 3 For each parameter select whether or not to enable the key lock Free Disable Lock Enable Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 10 2 10 2 Setting the Key Lock Function Basic Setting Mode Explanation Key locked parameter and the behavior during key lock can be set individually Parameter Behavior during Key Lock START key Disabled STOP key Disabled MENU key Disabled MEDIA key Disabled DISP ENTER key Disabled to change operation screens Alarm ACK soft key Disabled Math Computation Math START soft key Disabled Ma
118. Lime 12 Cyan Background White or black selectable Direction vertical or horizontal selectable Number of indication channels 6 channels per screen maximum Number of group screens 4 All channels indication 24 channels maximum including computation channels 1 2 and 3 dots selectable Waveform 1 2 5 10 20 30 min 1 2 4 hours div selectable One division has 30 dots Numerical value 1 s 2 s when the scan interval is 2 s Waveform Numerical value numerical display section can be turned ON OFF scale scale display can be turned ON OFF grid lines number of divisions selectable from 4 to 12 hours minutes on time axis trip lines line widths are selectable from 1 2 and 3 dots messages up to eight different messages of up to 16 characters for each alarm indication Zone display and partial expansion dispaly is available Direction Vertical or horizontal selectable Number of indication channels 6 channels per screen maximum Number of group screens 4 Scales 4 to 12 divisions selectable Base position of bar Left right or center only for horizontal display Display update rate 1 s 2 s when the scan interval is 2 s Contents Bar graph numerical value unit scale alarm indication Line width Display rate Contents suonesiioeds fa 14 3 14 2 Display Specifications Digital screen Number of indication channels 6 channels
119. Meas redvalye BGR Boo E ma g Alarm mark Indicator Hold Non Hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Alarm mark alarm type measured values All red Released Alarm mark Green color Alarm type Not displayed Measured value Blue color Hold Activated Alarm mark Blinks in red Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm type measured value Displayed in red Released Alarm mark Blinks in green Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm type Not displayed Measured value Blue Alarm indication in the digital display Measured value Alarm mark When the alarm indication is set to non hold alarm ACK does not work Indicator Hold Non Hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Alarm mark measured values All red Released Alarm mark Green Measured value Blue Hold Activated Alarm mark Blinks in red Stops blinking with alarm ACK Measured value Red Released Alarm mark Blinks in green Stops blinking with alarm ACK Measured value Blue When the alarm indication is set to non hold alarm ACK does not work 6 2 6 1 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay Option Alarm indication in the bar graph display 2 H Alarm mark 2 500 Alarm point mark ASR 1 165 Measured value Indicator Hold Non Hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Alarm mark alarm point mark and measured values All red Release
120. Measured data and Settings have been initialized 601 Measured data have been initialized 610 This username is already registered See section 10 6 611 There is no user who can enter to the SETUP mode See section 10 6 System Errors Servicing is required when a system error occurs Contact your nearest Omega dealer for repairs Code Message 901 ROM failure 902 RAM failure 910 A D memory failure for all input channels 911 Channel 1 A D memory failure 912 Channel 2 A D memory failure 913 Channel 3 A D memory failure 914 Channel 4 A D memory failure 921 Channel 1 A D calibration value error 922 Channel 2 A D calibration value error 923 Channel 3 A D calibration value error 924 Channel 4 A D calibration value error 930 Memory acquisition failure 940 The Ethernet module is down 12 7 Bunooyseaqnos D 12 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart Nothing is displayed Is the power switch on Does the switch work properly NO Turn on the power properly See section 3 2 YES Is the power supply NO gt connected properly Connect properly See section 2 7 YES NO Supply the power at the specified Is the power supplied properly voltage and frequency See section 14 7 k YES Is the fuse blown YES Replace the fuse See section 13 2 YES Does the fuse stay intact when the power is turned on again
121. Mode The menu screen and items of the basic setting mode are as follows Enclosed in parentheses are reference sections Basic setting mode Basic setting mode at Alarm casi AUX A D Temperature fie Keylock Memory and trend Save Load Initialize 1 2 E 4 Next 1 3 Next 2 3 To Save Load Initialize menu below Save Load Initialize menu Basic setting mode Save Load Initialize 1 Save settings oe tien 2 Load settings Psu Communication 3 Delete 4 Format me 5 Initialize CC E E O See RD MV100 communication Interface User s Manual Soft key Settings in the Basic Setting Mode Title Item 1 Alarm 6 4 Reflash alarm AND operation of alarm output relays Energize de energize alarm output relays Hold non hold alarm output relays Hold non hold alarm displays Rate of change alarm interval Alarm hysteresis 2 A D 5 9 Integration time of the A D converter Scan interval Burn out Off Up Down Reference junction compensation select internal external compensation voltage when using external Temperature 10 13 Temperature unit suoneiado uowwog 2pPoN UNy SHed JO SEWeN 7 3 5 Configuring the Functions Soft key Settings in the Basic Setting Mode Title Item 3 Memory 8 11 Save method to the external storage medium Type of data to be acquired Event data Sampling
122. Model RD MV1 xx 1 Floppy disk Model RD MV1 xx 2 Zip disk Model RD MV1 xx 3 ATA flash memory card For the handling procedure of the storage medium see section 2 1 Inserting the storage medium 1 Insert the medium into the drive until a click is heard 2 When the power switch is turned ON closing the front cover causes the RD MV100 to detect the existence of an external storage medium in the drive If the storage medium is detected an external storage medium icon is displayed in the status display section of the screen Note The external storage medium can t be detected when the MEDIA key is locked First release the MEDIA key and then press it See 10 2 Using key lock Floppy disk Zip disk ATA flash memory card Removing the storage medium Floppy disks and ATA flash memory cards can be removed from the drive regardless of whether the RD MV100 is turned ON or OFF Zip disks cannot be removed when the RD MV100 is turned OFF 1 If the RD MV100 is turned ON check that the storage medium is not being accessed Note The access lamp is lit while the storage medium is being accessed A message Data are being saved to the medium is displayed while measured computed data are being saved to the medium 3 5 suoneiado uowwog 2poN UNy SHed JO SEWeN 7 3 3 Inserting Removing the External Storage Medium Explanation 2 Open the front cover by pressing down on the knob that is located in
123. P connection FTP server name Character string Port number 21 Numerical value Login name Character string Password Account PASV mode On Initial pass Character string Ethernet login Use Not Use be Level Admin User 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 User 5 User 6 On Off On Off User name Character string Password Application On Ame out Time 1 to 120 min Numerical value Keep alive Off App 6 Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files This section describes the data format of the ASCII file The RD MV100 creates two types of ASCII files the manual sampled data file and the report file Data Format of the Manual Sampled Data File The manual sampled data are output in ASCII format using values and strings that are separated by commas The channel tag unit and manual sampled values are not output for channels in which the input range is set to Skip or for which the computation is turned OFF Example The following example is for channels 1 2 3 4 and 31 MANUAL SAMPLE DATA Model Serial No XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX File Header AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA CH TAG 1 CH01 CHO2 CHO3 CHO4 CH31 UNIT VV mV 2000 01 01 01 08 43 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 12 00 2000 01 01 01 08 48 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 12 00 2000 01 01 01 09 15 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 12 00 CH TAG 1 CHO1 CHO2 CHO3 CHO4
124. Qatana ori aR SAVING Cate saneren eriei ia internal memory condition K 1 24 10 1 10 2 key lock key login logout 1 24 10 4 10 6 key login logout l0g sicsctscrccsnteecistennercceavrvceve cies 10 9 L Doniceti eina a ear 4 9 6 6 E EE aaa EA 4 9 6 6 E E D E E E E seen A E eee eed 1 5 EG DSSCROG I oriori EEEE EA acess ce 3 1 IBV EEE E eae tei s views seas TA A pausnsesaaetacy 5 5 oading setup data basic setting MOE nnani aaa 9 4 SGtING MOOG seircscce te edeseere atte siis a 9 2 oTo MEEA 1 25 10 8 OGiCal COMPUTATION Eeoa E EAE 11 5 OUND GN eaa EA ES 1 22 10 15 OWEN imitalariM eee 1 17 6 6 ower limit on rate of change alarm 1 18 6 7 M MAG address iieiea nee aes 10 8 MAINTON ANCE saareen am rarai PESE aenar ETE EEE 13 1 manyalsampl eccna ana 8 9 8 26 Gata fOPMAL cscccccccscesecssecsessirsissitacreecsdveievdtvscreeiees App 7 manual save 8 10 8 15 memory end relay output time s sess ne 10 10 MEMOTY SUMIMANY sccsersnvccnsrssssicerssicrceasabenvecssagn needa 1 11 4 13 we 7 4 7 7 1 11 4 13 sede A E A E T iv MONIY TEPO orisiirisii a 11 22 11 26 MOVING AVELAGE cisrenan eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeaeeeeeaee 1 3 5 14 N NOT eshte tee eee ee 11 6 Index 2 O operation MOMS wie nisaties n n operation screen OPTION terminal esris naea Over range sesssessnssnsnesannnnsnenananannsnsnasanasnsnenananacnsnnnnsannsa overview screen P panel CULOUt eign aa eee aes
125. R A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED LIMITATION OF LIABILITY The remedies of purchaser set forth herein are exclusive and the total liability of OMEGA with respect to this order whether based on contract warranty negligence indemnification strict liability or otherwise shall not exceed the purchase price of the component upon which liability is based In no event shall OMEGA be liable for consequential incidental or special damages CONDITIONS Equipment sold by OMEGA is not intended to be used nor shall it be used 1 as a Basic Component under 10 CFR 21 NRC used in or with any nuclear installation or activity or 2 in medical applications or used on humans Should any Product s be used in or with any nuclear installation or activity medical application used on humans or misused in any way OMEGA assumes no responsibility as set forth in our basic WARRANTY DISCLAIMER language and additionally purchaser will indemnify OMEGA and hold OMEGA harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of the use of the Product s in such a manner RETURN REQUESTS INQUIRIES Direct all warranty and repair requests inquiries to the OMEGA Customer Service Department BEFORE RETURNING ANY PRODUCT S TO OMEGA PURCHASER MUST OBTAIN AN AUTHORIZED RETURN AR NUMBER FROM OMEGA S CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENT IN ORDER TO AVOID PROCESSING DELAYS The assigned AR number should then be marked on the outside of the return packag
126. RD MV112 approx 3 8 kg Measuring and Recording Accuracy The following specifications apply to operation of the recorder under standard operation conditions Temperature 23 2 C Humidity 55 10 RH Power supply voltage 90 to 132 or 180 to 250 VAC Power supply frequency 50 60 Hz 1 Warm up time Atleast 30 minutes Other ambient conditions such as vibration should not adversely affect recorder operation Measurement Accuracy Digital Display Max Resolution of Digital Display DC voltage 0 1 of rdg 2 digits 0 15 of rdg 1 C However R S 3 7 C at 0 to 100 C 1 5 C at 100 to 300 C TC Excluding the B 2 C at 400 to 600 C Accuracy at less than 400 C is not guaranteed reference junction compensation 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C However 0 15 of rdg 1 C at 200 to 100 C accuracy 0 15 of rdg 0 5 C 0 15 of rdg 0 5 C However 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C at 200 to 100 C 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C 0 15 of rdg 1 C 0 15 of rdg 0 5 C clr s z Alc m x However 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C at 200 to 100 C Uv a fo oO 0 15 of rdg 0 3 C 14 13 suonesiioeds 14 7 General Specifications Measuring accuracy in case of scaling digits Accuracy during scaling digits measuring accuracy digits x multiplier 2
127. Resistance Temperature Detector Input Leadwire resistance 10 Q max wire The resistance of the three wires should be approximately equal Thermocouple Input Extension leadwire CLA DC Current Input DC current input Q y Q Q Shunt resistor NOTE For a 4 to 20 mA input use a shunt resistor of 250 0 1 2 6 2 4 Alarm Output Wiring A1 to A3 Option A WARNING To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF If a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied to the alarm output terminal use ring tongue crimp on lugs with insulation sleeves on all terminals to prevent the wires from slipping out when the screws become loose Furthermore use double insulated wires dielectric strength of 2300 VAC or more for the signal wires on which a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied For all other wires use basic insulated wires dielectric strength of 1350 VAC To prevent electric shock attach the terminal cover after wiring and make sure not to touch the terminals Wiring Procedure 1 Turn OFF the recorder and remove the cover for the option terminal 2 Connect the alarm output wires to the terminal The terminal arrangement will be one of the figures shown below depending on the alarm output
128. Specification Output type Relay transfer contact energize de energize switchable Output capacity 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3A 250 VDC 0 1 A resistive load Dielectric strength 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute between output terminals and earth ground terminal For details related to the switching of energized de energized state of the alarm relays see section 6 4 2 8 2 5 FAIL Memory End Wiring F1 Option A WARNING To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF If a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied to the FAIL Memory End output terminal use ring tongue crimp on lugs with insulation sleeves on all terminals to prevent the wires from slipping out when the screws become loose Furthermore use double insulated wires dielectric strength of 2300 VAC or more for the signal wires on which a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied For all other wires use basic insulated wires dielectric strength of 1350 VAC To prevent electric shock attach the terminal cover after wiring and make sure not to touch the terminals EeEeEEEEEEyx_ ey Wiring Procedure 1 Turn OFF the recorder and remove the cover for the option terminal 2 Connect the FAIL Memory End output wires to the terminal The terminal arrangement for the FAIL Memory End output option is as follows Terminal position
129. The types of data that can be used in equations are measurement channels computation channels constants KO1 to K12 communication interface data C01 to C12 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 You can specify a computing equation that performs relational computation on a computing element AND Logical product uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog Syntax e1ANDe2 Condition If both e1 and e2 are non 0 the operation results in 1 otherwise in 0 Status e1 0 e2 0 e1ANDe2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1ANDe2 0 e1 0 e240 e1ANDe2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1ANDe2 1 11 2 Explanation of Computing Equations OR Logical sum Syntax e10Re2 Condition If both e1 and e2 are 0 the operation results in 0 otherwise in 1 Status e1 0 e2 0 e10Re2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e10Re2 1 e1 0 e240 e10Re2 1 e140 e240 e10Re2 1 XOR Mutually exclusive logical sum Syntax e1XORe2 Condition If e1 and e2 have different values the operation results in 1 otherwise in 0 Status e1 0 e2 0 e1XORe2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1XORe2 1 e1 0 e240 e1XORe2 1 e1 0 e240 e1XORe2 0 NOT Logical negation Syntax NOTet1 Condition Reverses the value of data e1 Status e1 0 NOTe1 1 e1 0 NOTe1 0 EXAMPLE 01 020R03 GT 04 Determines the OR of the computed results of 01 02 and 03 GT 04 11 2 Explanation of Computing Equations TLOG Computation MAX MIN
130. UNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Log soft key The types of logs that can be displayed are assigned to the soft keys and displayed 3 Press a soft key to display the log Error soft key Displays a log of error messages Key login soft key Displays a log of key login logout e Commu soft key Displays a log of communication commands that have been executed FTP soft key Displays a log of file transfers made using the FTP client function e System soft key Displays a system screen 4 Use the up and down keys to scroll through the log Returning to the operation screen To return to the operation screen from the log screen or the system screen press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu select the desired screen using the up and down arrow keys and then press the DISP ENTER key Error message log The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen total number of logs Date and time of occurrence Error code Error message 885 085 Time No Hessage Jan 12 2088 08 36 47 261 Not enough free space on media Jan 12 2088 08 36 19 218 Hedia has not been inserted Jan 11 2088 04 15 38 The input numerical value exceeds the set range Jan 11 2088 84 15 28 BAS The input numerical value exceeds the set range Jan 11 2088 83 23 19 681 Neasured data have been initialized 10 8 10 5 Displaying the Log Screen System Screen Ke
131. a value and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 5 Relay On Off Set whether or not to activate the relay output If On is selected output relay Number is displayed 6 Number Set the output relay number For the correspondence between the output relay number and the output relay position see section 2 4 Alarm Output Wiring Option If the alarm output relay option Ax is not installed this setting is void Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Alarm type Two types of alarms are available Name Symbol Description Upper limit alarm H An alarm occurs when the measured value becomes greater than or equal to the alarm value Lower limit alarm L An alarm occurs when the measured value becomes smaller than or equal to the alarm value Delay upper limit alarm T An alarm occurs when the measured value remains above or equal to the alarm value for the specified time period delay period see section 6 3 Setting the Alarm Delay Period Delay lower limit alarm t An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below or equal to the alarm value for the specified time period delay period see section 6 3 Setti
132. age medium The function is the same as that in the basic setting mode e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press the soft key Next 1 3 Press 7 soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press the softkey Next 1 3 Press 7 soft key to display the Delete screen Delete Directory File name i ETL PNL 2000 01 01 48 2 File list PNL 2000 01 01 04 1 AAG PNL 2000 01 02 00 5 B81 SET2 PNL 2000 01 01 00 35 882 SAITO PNL 2000 01 15 03 27 883 KATSU PNL 1999 89 14 15 4 R1isg6n L2H 1999 88 28 18 3 RSUBBB L2H 1999 88 17 22 56 Deleting a file in a directory 1 Of the directories listed in the Directory name frame select the directory in which the file you wish to delete exists using the up and down arrow keys The File name frame displays a list of files in the selected directory is the root directory 2 Pressing the right arrow key moves the cursor onto the File name frame Use the up and down arrow keys to select the file to be deleted 3 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays a confirmation dialog box 4 Use the arrow keys to select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key to delete the selected file The file is cleared from the file list To cancel the delete operation select No and press the DISP ENTER key Note If the ESC key is pressed in the middle of the operation the sc
133. ages displayed on tne error log screen messages corresponding to communication commands Errors Related to Parameter Settings e Setting Errors Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref Section 1 System error Contact your nearest Omega dealer 2 Incorrect date or time setting See section 3 7 3 A disabled channel is selected See Communication Interface User s Manual 4 Incorrect function parameter See Communication Interface User s Manual 5 The input numerical value exceeds the set range Enter a proper value 6 Incorrect input character string Enter a proper character string 7 Too many characters Enter specified number of characters 8 Incorrect input mode See Communication Interface User s Manual 9 Incorrect input range code See Communication Interface User s Manual 21 Cannot set an alarm for a skipped channel See Communication Interface User s Manual 22 The upper and lower span limits are equal See sections 5 1 to 5 7 23 The upper and lower scale limits are equal See sections 5 5 and 5 6 30 The partial boundary value exceeds the range of the span See section 7 11 31 Partialexpansion display is set ON for a SKIPPED channel See Communication Interface User s Manual 35 The upper and lower limits of the display band are equal See section 7 9 36 The lower limit of the display band is greater tha
134. aily 16 POM priina aana aari aaan aE 11 22 11 26 data ACQUISITION sssini aa a aaa aa a ER 8 3 data Torma teade eaaa e Eaa 8 6 App 7 Gatalty Peirce etter elie overs ait 8 1 8 3 date ANG UME saarea arisandi tasata 3 23 DOCUMENT aara eE AEEA NEE eE 5 2 DOVA Onun a En RR 5 1 delay lower limit alarm eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeerersreerene 1 18 6 7 delay upper limit alarm 0 0 0 0 cece cece cece eeeeeeeeeee 1 18 6 7 deleting directories x CeletiNg Mle Senora oaee TEAR D ltasiraann ar eiia E a A ESE mE T E L E E A AR difference COMPUTATION ssassn 5 7 difference lower limit alarm cccccceceesseeeeeeeeeee 1 18 6 6 difference upper limit alarm 0 0 ceseeeeee eects 1 18 6 6 Cigital WMPUt ssccicia cchcctesesieecctebadesecnes sie aiaa a 5 5 digital SGre ET iris ena tentieees en iatiies 1 9 4 5 dimentional drawings ccese cess ee eee eeeeeeeeeeneeee 14 18 directory name A display CONOP wssiccccsnvsresccieerereeseenneinneereinasiccermnriscnvesecs display conditions of the LCD o oo eee 1 14 display data 8 3 sampling interval 0 cccceceeee eee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeteeeneeeees 7 3 SEUNG Airo iaa r O a etesiateaeses start stop ki display FUNCTION iasiciiiirisninininnnnunniiainiai iina iiaiai displayed dala renuccanunssinni a aE displayed language Index 1 E Eee Di aves eet sa acta ahah sack ae cence E elas ES eject button entering Characters scenas 3 22 entering NUMDENS e
135. ake sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power Necessity of Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective grounding wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective grounding terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard Defect of Protective Grounding Do not operate the instrument when the protective grounding or the fuse might be defective Also make sure to check them before operation Fuse for 12 VDC Power Model To prevent fire only use a fuse that has a rating voltage current and type that is specified by the instrument When replacing a fuse turn OFF the power switch and unplug the power cord Never short the fuse holder Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard Do Not Remove Covers Some areas inside the instrument have high voltages Do not remove the cover if the power supply is connected The cover should be removed by Omega s qualified personnel only External Connection Connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement or control unit Damage to the Protective Housing Using the instrument in a manner not specified in this manual can damage the instrument s protective housing Checking the Contents of the Package Unpack the b
136. al Screen Bar graph Screen The measured computed data are displayed using numerical values in large size See section 4 3 SUOIJOUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 Channel Tag 0 675 163 56 y 2 4 0 677 0 677 Measured computed value y y Unit Hoos BE H Alarm mark Display update rate Measured and computed values are updated every second However when the scan interval on the RD MV106 RD MV112 is 2 s the display update rate is also 2 s The measured computed data are displayed using bar graphs See section 4 3 Bar graph display Vertical m SA n 216 Cd 2 Tag Channel E BE amp Alarm mark 2 000 2 500 3 000 3 500 Upper limit of span a Alarm point mark Bar graph 2 000 2 500 3 000 3 599_ ___ Lower limit of span E vI Cc Vi Cc vI E v1 _ Unit 8 712 6 718 8 711 8 711 Measured computed value Display update rate Measured and computed values are updated every second However when the scan interval on the RD MV106 RD MV112 is 2 s the display update rate is also 2 s Displayed information The following Information can be displayed Information Description The bar graphs can be displayed horizontally or vertically gt Section 7 13 When the bar graph is displayed horizontally the starting point of the bar base position can be set to the minimum edge of the measurement scale or to the center position Section 7 10
137. all channel display is selected waveforms for all channels that are registered to display the trend see section 8 10 are displayed even when the group is changed 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu TREND HISTORY is selected 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select the group using the up and down arrow keys 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the selected group To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Expanding reducing the time axis The time axis can be expanded or reduced with respect to the display reference position Display data The time axis can be expanded to twice the trend display It can also be reduced down to 1 60th of the trend display Event data The time axis can be reduced down to 1 60th The factor by which the display can be expanded or reduced at one time by carrying out the procedures below varies depending on the display update rate for the display data and the sampling interval for the event data being displayed To expand or reduce the display further repeat the procedures below 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu TREND HISTORY is selected 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select ZOOM or ZOOM using the up and down arrow keys 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER expand or reduce the time axis
138. alues and store computed data Channels assignable to computed data RD MV102 RD MV104 Up to 4 channels RD MV106 RD MV112 Up to 12 channels Operation General arithmetic operations Four arithmetic operations square root absolute common logarithm exponential power relational operations lt lt gt 2 logical operations AND OR NOT XOR Statistical operations Average maximum minimum and summation Special operations Rolling average Constant Available Up to 12 constants Digital input data via communication Digital data via communication can be used in calculation expression Up to 12 data Remote input status Remote input status 0 1 can be used in calculation expression Up to 8 inputs Report functions Report type Hourly daily daily monthly and daily weekly Operation Average maximum minimum and summation Data format ASCII suonesiioeds 14 11 14 6 Specifications of Optional Functions 3 terminal Isolated RTD Input N2 A B b terminals are of isolated input type Can be specified only for RD MV106 and RD MV112 A B b terminals of RD MV102 and RD MV104 are isolated as standard 12 VDC Power Supply Powered by 12 VDC For related specifications see Power Supply Normal Operating Conditions Effects of Operating Conditions and Other Specifications in section 14 7 Rated power supply 12 VDC Allowable power supply voltage r
139. and lower limits difference upper and lower limits and upper limit and lower on rate of change Selectable from 0 s to 3600 s for each channel Interval time of rate of change alarms Display Hysteresis Relay outputs option Alarm information The scan interval times 1 to 15 common to all channels The alarm status type is displayed in the numerical value display area upon occurrence of an alarm A common alarm indication is also displayed in the status display section The alarm indication behavior non hold or hold type can be selectable for common to all channels On 0 5 of display span off selectable applied to upper and lower limits alarms common to all measurement channels Number of points 2 4 6 points Relay action Energized deenergized hold non hold AND OR reflash function selectable The times of alarm occurrences recoveries alarm types etc Up to 120 latest alarms are stored in the internal memory Displayed on the alarm summary screen 14 8 14 5 Specifications of Communication Functions Connection Ethernet 10BASE T Protocols TCP IP FTP client functions Automatic file transport from RD MV FTP client protocol FTP server functions File transport on request by host computer FTP server protocol Directory operation file output file delete and informing of the rest of memory space on the external storge medium Files can be transported Display data file event
140. ange 10 to 18 VDC Rated power consumption 30 VA Remote Control R1 This option allows the following functions to be controlled remotely by a contact input up to eight contact inputs Start stop of memory rising and falling edge e Trigger for event data acquisition trigger 250 ms or longer e Time adjustment adjusting the time to a preset time upon contact signal trigger 250 ms or longer Time of Trigger On Processing Cut off reading of less than one minute hh 00 00 to hh 01 59 e g 10 00 50 is corrected as 10 00 00 Round up reading of less than one minute e g 10 59 50 is corrected as 11 00 00 hh 02 00 to hh 57 59 No process is to be performed hh 58 00 to hh 59 59 Start stop of computation rising and falling edge e Reset of computation data trigger 250 ms or longer e Manual sample trigger 250 ms or longer Message display Up to 8 different messages can be set trigger 250 ms or longer e Load of setting parameters Up to 3 settings can be set trigger 250 ms or longer e Alarm acknowledgement trigger 250 ms or longer 14 12 14 7 General Specifications Construction Installing Dimensions Weight Standard Performance Standing on its front feet the recorder can be inclined backwards up to 30 degrees from a horizontal plane approx 152 W x 225 H x 240 D mm RD MV102 approx 3 7 kg RD MV104 approx 3 7 kg RD MV106 approx 3 8 kg
141. annels to Report CH 6 Channel Set the measurement or computation channel to assign to the report channel All measurement and computation channels can be specified However the reports are not created for channels that are set to Skip or those that have the computation turned Off 7 Sum scale sum unit Select Off s min h or day See section 11 11 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Date Day of the week This is the date for monthly reports or the day of the week for weekly reports The report is created at the specified time on the specified date or day of the week Time This is the time at which daily weekly and monthly reports are created Hourly reports are created every hour on the hour 11 27 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog Chapter 12 Troubleshooting 12 1 A List of Messages Occasionally error codes and messages appear on the screen while using the recorder The entire list of messages is given below Error codes and messages related to communications are also listed here The messages are displayed in the language that you have chosen For the procedures regarding language selection see section 10 10 However the following messages are displayed only in English mess
142. are saved to DATA0 A00 and the second set of data are saved to DATAO A01 9 5 ejeg BHuilziyeniuy pue saji4 Huibeuey el 9 3 Viewing Display Data in the External Storage Medium Procedure Loads the display data saved in the external storage medium and displays the waveform on the historical trend screen This operation can be carried out when the acquisition of display data is set Display or E D in section 8 11 See section 4 6 for the use of the historical trend e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press the soft key Next 1 3 Press soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen A Press m soft key to display the Load display data screen Load display data Directory File name 10108580 DDS 2000 01 01 80 59 File list DATA23 10104120 DDS 2000 01 01 04 12 Hs2 10104130 DDS 2000 01 01 10 14 2 DATA21 16165138 DDS 2660 61 01 16 14 0 DATA22 16186136 DDS 2660 61 61 10 14 16116098 DDS 2000 01 01 10 15 For models with the batch function BT1 option press the Time soft key when displaying the date and time of file creation and the Batch soft key when displaying the batch number and lot number 1 The directories in the external storage medium are displayed in the Directory name column Press the up or down arrow key to select the directory contain
143. arm Off On Power failure recovery Power failure recovery Operation when the alarm setting is changed If a new delay alarm is set the alarm detection starts at that time It is unaffected by the conditions existing before the alarm is set If the alarm setting of a preexisting delay alarm is changed If an alarm is not occurring at the time of the change alarm detection starts at the new setting If an alarm is occurring at the time of the change and the alarm type is set to delay upper limit alarm the alarm continues as long as the input is above or equal to the new setting If the input is below the new setting the alarm turns OFF If the alarm type is set to delay lower limit alarm the alarm continues as long as the input is below or equal to the new setting If the input is above the new setting the alarm turns OFF 6 9 suuely Buijes pue Huibpe mouyoy K 6 4 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function Basic Setting Mode Procedure Set the auxiliary alarm function e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys e The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow Once new settings are confirmed they change back to white Press mw Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To
144. as made System screen See section 1 8 10 9 suoljoung 48410 2 10 6 Setting the Memory End Relay Output Time Option F1 Basic Setting Mode Procedure This function activates the relay output when the remaining space time in the internal memory or storage medium becomes small Set the minimum storage time of the internal memory at which the relay should be activated The initial setting is 1 hour e This function is valid when the FAIL Memory End output relay F1 option is installed e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys e The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press ew Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Press the softkey Next 1 3 To display the setting screen press the soft key 5 AUX Tag Channel Channel Memory alarm at m Language English Partial Use The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Memory alarm This is the minimum storage time of the internal memory at which the relay should be activated Select a value from 1 h 2 h 5h 10h 20 h 50 h and 100 h Confirming operation To confir
145. ase Rate of change Decrease The time interval is specified using a number of sampling times Select the limit from 1 to 15 using the soft key Setting the alarm hysteresis 7 Hysteresis Select On or Off using the soft key On The hysteresis is 0 5 of the display span or scale Off no hysteresis Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Alarm output relay option A contact signal is generated when an alarm occurs The number of output relays is 2 to 6 points depends on the specification Reflash When multiple alarms are set to one alarm output relay this function notifies the succeeding alarms after the first alarm that causes the relay operation When a succeeding alarm occurs the output relay temporarily turns OFF The reflash alarm function is set only to output relays 101 102 and 103 The initial setting is Off Not use Reflash _ assuming 101 is assigned Channel 1 I 1 assuming 101 is assigned Alarm status Channel 2 I I I I assuming 101 is assigned Channel 3 ee eee r r 1 101 output Alarm relay status Output relay reflash on option Approx 500 ms Approx 500 ms 101 output Alarm relay status Output relay put reflash off option NOte a If the r
146. ased state you can select to release the alarm indicator in sync with the alarm release non hold release the alarm indicator with an alarm acknowledge operation hold The initial setting is Nonhold For details regarding the alarm indicator see section 6 1 6 13 Chapter 7 Setting and Operating the Display 7 1 Setting Tag Names Procedure Tag names can be displayed in place of channel numbers on the operation screen trend display digital display etc Tag names are saved to the file along with the data The basic setting mode is used to select whether tags or channel numbers are displayed Setting tag names These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key 2 Setting on a computation channel option Twice press the soft key Next 1 3 To display the setting screen press the soft key 11 1 1 First CH far Last cH far First CH 31 Last cH Br Tag ss 2 E 2 TLOG Timer No 1 Sum scale Off Rolling average Off Hoving ave
147. ay period Enter an integer value in the range 1 to 3600 s and press the DISP ENTER key Procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 If the scan interval is 2 s and you set an odd value for the alarm delay period it will operate at the specified period 1 s Example If the alarm delay period is set to 5 s it will operate at 6 s Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 6 8 6 3 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function Basic Setting Mode Explanation Operation of the delay upper lower limit alarm For the operation of the delay upper lower limit alarm see section 1 5 Alarm Function This section will describe special cases of its operation When delay alarm is set on a computation channel and the computation is stopped If the computation is stopped in a condition in which the computed value is exceeding the alarm setting the alarm is turned ON after the specified period delay period elapses Computation stopped Alarm setting Computed value Alarm turns ON Delay alarm when a power failure occurs Alarm detection is reset upon a power failure It restarts the operation after the power recovers Measured computed value Alarm setting Al
148. ay see Historical Trend in this section For the operating procedure see section 4 5 Number of the alarm information displayed at the last line of the screen Number of the alarm information in the internal memory Tag Channel Alarm No Type Date amp Time when the alarm occurred _ 06 806 Charrel Tyee Alarm IN Time Alarm QUT Time Date amp Time Cursor 7 13 q 213 39 gt S A no ollaa Janes Olla when the alarm released es 1H Jan G9 01 11 07 Jan 3 01 11 09 es 1H Jan 9 01 10 58 Jan 3 01 11 05 1 Jan 9 01 10 54 9 Jan 9 01 11 24 1 Jan 09 01 10 05 Jan G9 01 10 18 I Mark See section 6 1 1 3 Display Function Message Summary The messages that were entered in the trend display and the times when they were entered message information are displayed in a list By scrolling the screen using a key up to 100 incidents can be displayed By selecting a message from the list using arrow keys the historical trend of the display data or event data containing the message can be recalled For a description on the historical trend display see Historical Trend in this section For the operating procedure see section 4 5 Number of the message displayed at the last line of the screen Number of the messages in the internal memory Message Date and time the message was entered User name when using key login function SUOIJOUNY JO MAIAJIOAO 7 O11 Messase Tim
149. ay data file in the internal memory is closed and saved to the external storage medium The event data in the trigger or rotate mode are unaffected by this operation Save Event The event data file in the internal memory is closed and saved to the external storage medium The data are acquired to the internal memory for the specified period from the point at which the data were previously saved to the external storage medium using key operation Then the data in the internal memory are saved to the storage medium This operation is repeated Execute data saving to the external storage medium using key operation 1000 Tigo 12 001720 Ba Time I i gt T Store to external 11720 storage medium Saving the Data to the Storage Medium Using Key Operation All data in the internal memory are saved to the external storage medium This cannot be executed while data acquisition or computation is in progress For the operating procedure see section 9 2 Note See section 9 7 or 9 8 to clear data in the internal memory 8 17 wnp n abe10 sg jeusa xyq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eea 8 8 Setting the Auto Save Interval for the Display Data Procedure When the method to save the data residing in the memory to the external storage medium is auto save you set the auto save interval The auto save interval is used in saving the display data e The display data residing in the internal memory is automaticall
150. bers 1 The character type is switched in the following order each time the 1 a A soft key is pressed The selected character type is displayed to the right down of the input window Upper case alphabet A lower case alphabet a gt numbers 1 DEL soft key Deletes the character at the cursor position BS soft key Deletes the character to the left of the cursor position INS soft key Selects insert or overwrite Insert and overwrite modes switch each time the INS soft key is pressed The selected mode is displayed to the right down of the input window Copying a Character String Procedure To copy a character string to another box follow the procedures below 1 Move the cursor to the copy source string and press the Copy soft key 2 Move the cursor to the copy destination box and press the Paste soft key The character string is copied Input Clear Copy Paste Clearing the character string 1 To clear the character string press the Clear soft key 3 22 3 7 Setting the Date and Time Procedure Set the date and time The set date and time can be specified whether it belong to the summer time or the winter time The summer time and the winter time are defined by the daylight savings time adjustment function For detail see section 10 12 Using the Daylight Savings Time Adjustment Function Press rew Press the soft key Next 1 3 To display the window for the date a
151. bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key Oo Hemory and trend Heas CH Nath CH 4 F 2 First H f l Last H ar On Off On 3 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Meas CH Math CH To set the measurement channels select Meas CH To set the computation channels select Math CH 2 First channel and last channel Select the desired channel numbers 3 On Off On Display the trend Off Do not display the trend The initial setting is On for all channels Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key The number of measurement and computation channels available in the different models Model Measurement Channel Computation Channel RD MV102 2 channels 1 to 2 4 channels 31 to 34 RD MV104 4 channels 1 to 4 4 channels 31 to 34 RD MV106 6 channels 1 to 6 12 channels 31 to 42 RD MV112 12 channels 1 to 12 12 channels 31 to 42 8 22 8 11 Setting the Method of
152. ces Data Type Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Example 4 Continuously record the waveform data as in the conventional chart type recorders Select display data only Continuously record the waveform data and when an alarm occurs record detailed data around the alarm incident Select display data and event data For the event data select Trigger or Rotate for the mode Specify the trigger used to start the event data acquisition and the time period during which to acquire the data event data file size Continuously record detailed data Select even data only Select Free for the mode Recording is not necessary under normal circumstances Only record detailed data around the alarm incident Select event data only Select Trigger or Rotate for the mode Specify the trigger used to start the event data acquisition and the time period during which to acquire the data Select display data only display data and event data or event data only Channels to be Stored Select the channels to be acquired from measurement and computation channels Data Acquisition e Display data This operation is performed when the type of data acquired is set to display data only or display data and event data Data acquisition starts when the START key is pressed and stopps when the STOP key is pressed The display data are overwritten when the displa
153. communication interface can be used Enter the data as C01 to C12 in the equations For the procedure used to set the data see the RD MV100 Communication Interface User s Manual IM RD MV100 17E Range of numerical values Maximum number of significant digits is 5 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 Conditions of the remote control terminals D01 to D08 The conditions of the remote input signal can be assigned to 1 and 0 and used in the equations Enter the data as D01 to D08 the number following the letter D is the remote terminal number in the equations The correlation between the conditions of the remote input signal and the value 1 and 0 are shown below Type of the Remote Input Signal Status 1 or 0 Contact close 1 open 0 Open collector Voltage level is Lo at the remote terminal 1 Voltage level is Hi at the remote terminal 0 The unit corresponding to the measured computed data in the equation is not compensated In computations measured and computed data are handled as values without units For example if the measured data from channel 01 is 20 mV and the measured data from channel 02 is 20 V the computed result of 01 02 is 40 Order of Precedence of the Operators The order of precedence of the operators in the equation is as follows The operators are placed in order from the highest precedence Type Operator higher precedenc
154. ction also start stop For the operating procedure see sections 11 3 and 11 12 MEDIA Detects the external storage medium and saves the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium in the manual save mode Functions of the Setting and Basic Setting Modes Configure recorder functions using the arrow keys the DISP ENTER key the soft keys and the character number input keys See 3 5 Configuring the functions and chapters 5 through 11 for detail Also see section 9 1 to save the setup data 3 9 suoneiado UoWUOD epoyy UNY S 1edg JO SEEN 3 5 Configuring the Functions Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode Basic setting mode The basic setting mode is used to change the basic configuration of various functions Basic setting mode cannot be entered while data acquisition or computation is in progress Setting mode The setting mode is used to change the functions for each channel and the display specifications All items except the ones listed below can be changed while data acquisition or computation is in operation Items that cannot be changed are grayed and the cursor cannot be moved on them Items that cannot be changed while data acquisition is in progress Input range The trend s display update rate Auto save interval e Computing equation Constants for computation Items that cannot be changed while computation is in progress Range setting Computing equation Constants f
155. ction 4 5 When a power failure occurs the event data file in the internal memory is closed as one file Pre Trigger for the Event Data Pre trigger is applied to the event data with Trigger or Rotate modes You can have event data before the trigger point be stored It is specified in terms of a percentage of the data length 0 5 25 50 75 95 100 If 0 is selected all data are after the trigger point The initial setting is 0 Trigger Type for the Event Data When Trigger or Rotate is selected the trigger type is selected by turning each type of trigger ON OFF The triggers operate in an OR fashion the trigger is activated when any of the conditions that are turned ON are satisfied Type Description Key trigger External trigger Alarm trigger The trigger condition is satisfied when the FUNC Trigger soft key is pressed The trigger condition is satisfied when the external contact specified by Remote Control function is turned ON See section 10 9 The trigger condition is satisfied when any of the alarms occur 8 5 wnp n abe10 sg jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy ea e 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data Number of Data Points that can be Acquired and Sampling Length The Maximum Auto Save Interval for Display Data the Maximum Data Length for Event Data This section describes the number of data points of the display data event data that can be acqu
156. ctions the external storage drive the options and the MAC address Internet address can be displayed For details related to the display format see section 10 5 Number of measurement channels Number of computation channels ANALOG 12 HATH 12 MEMORY 1280000 Internal memory capacity dh BATCH Optional functions RS 422 Communication function ETHERNET j s ZIP External storage medium drive ALARH 4 FAIL MENEND Optional functions PRODUCT HAC address 00 00 64 80 B0 00 _ MAC address When the cramped input terminal is equipped H2 option C is indicated as Analog 12 C in this example Displayed Language The displayed language can be set to English Japanese German or French If German or French is selected the following information is displayed in the specified language For all other information the displays will be the same as those for English Locations where German or French is used Menu used to switch the screen in the operation mode Function menus in the operation mode Error Messages Operation guide screens confirmation screen that appears when the STOP key is pressed or the selection screen that appears when exiting the basic setting mode for example For the setting procedure see section 10 8 1 25 suonoun4 JO MAIAJOAO 7 1 8 Other Functions FAIL Memory End Function Option Operation at system failure T
157. d on the external storage medium The data are appended to this file at each time interval When the number of TLOG data sets exceeds 400 a new file is created Note e When auto save is selected and there is no medium in the drive at the time when data are supposed to be saved all unsaved data are saved the first time when the interval time expires after the storage medium is reinserted into the drive The maximum value minimum value are not saved to the external medium Report data The first time report computation is executed a report data file is created on the external storage medium The data are appended to this file at each time interval A file is created for each type of report such as hourly reports and daily reports Note When auto save is selected and there is no medium in the drive at the time when data are supposed to be saved all unsaved data are saved the first time when the interval time expires after the storage medium is reinserted into the drive Dividing report files The report files are divided at the following times When data acquisition is stopped e For hourly reports When the 0 00 report is created every day When the number of data sets in the file reaches 25 e For daily reports e When the report for the first day of the month is created every month When the number of data sets in the file reaches 32 wnp n abe10 sg jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eead e 8 5 Acquiring Displa
158. d Alarm mark Green Alarm point mark Green Measured value Blue Hold Activated Alarm mark Blinks in red Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm point measured values Red Released Alarm mark Blinks in green Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm point mark Green Measured value Blue Alarm indication in the overview display Alarm type Channel Tag When the alarm indication is set to non hold alarm ACK does not work Channel data display area Measured value Indicator Hold Non Hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hola Activated Channel display area Red Channel tag alarm type and measured values All white Released Channel display area Green Channel tag and measured value Black Alarm type Not displayed Hold Activated Channel display area Red Channel tag Blinks in white Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm type and measured value White Released Channel display area Green Channel tag Blinks in black Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm type Not displayed Measured value Black When the alarm indication is set to non hold alarm ACK does not work 6 3 suuely Pumas pue Huibpe mouyoy K 6 1 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay Option Alarm summary display O66 Channel Ture Alarm IN Time Alam OUT Time gt e1 1H Jan G9 01 13 13 Jan 3 01 13 33 1 A Jan 9 01
159. d at the normally the TLOG data scheduled time to perform the TLOG computation All measured computed data excluding the power disruption period are used How the Measured Computed Data are Handled when there is an Abnormality in the Data Type of Abnormal Data Report Data AVE MAX MIN P P SUM Positive overflow not used used not used Negative overflow not used used not used Error not used not used not used 11 16 11 8 Setting the Timer Number and Sum Unit for TLOG Computation Procedure Set the number of the timer used by the channel computing the TLOG Also set the sum scale that is used when determining the sum in TLOG SUM These are set in the setting mode The timer specifications are set in the basic setting mode These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Twice press the softkey Next 1 3 To display the setting screen press the soft key 11 1 LaO First CH fai Last cH Br Tag TLOG Timer No 2 Sum scale Off 3 Rolling average off Os Alarm Delay Time 1 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspo
160. d out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press the soft key Next 1 3 Press soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen 1 Press oa soft key to display the Save settings screen Save settings File name a File name Time SET PNL 2000 01 01 00 26 File list a PNL 2000 01 01 04 18 AAAG PNL 2000 01 02 00 53 SET2 PNL 2000 01 01 60 35 SAITO PNL 2000 01715 83 27 KATSU PNL 1999 09 14 15 47 1 Enter the name of the setup data file to be saved Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string up to 8 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 To cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Clear data menu press the ESC key Note The extension PNL will automatically be added to the file name The following character combinations cannot be used as file names AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK All spaces are not allowed for file names e Spaces at the top or in the middle of a character string are also not allowed 2 Press the DISP ENTER key to save the data The saved file appears in the file list If a file with the same name as you entered exists on the external storage medium a message will appear to confirm overwriting Select Yes
161. d using the DISP ENTER key or arrow key FUNC key menu in the operation mode displayed when the FUNC key is pressed e Error Messages e Operation guide screens confirmation screen that appears when the STOP key is pressed or the selection screen that appears when exiting the basic setting mode for example 10 14 This page intentionally left blank suonouny 19440 E 10 15 This page intentionally left blank 10 16 This page intentionally left blank suonouny 194 0 E 10 17 This page intentionally left blank 10 18 This page intentionally left blank suonouny 194 0 E 10 19 10 12 Using the Daylight Savings Time Adjustment Function Procedure When the specified time is reached at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be enabled the time set at Summer the recorder automatically sets the clock ahead by one hour Example If the time is set to 9 O clock on June 1 the time is set ahead to 10 O clock June 1 When the specified time is reached at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be disabled the time set at Winter the recorder automatically sets the clock back by one hour Example If the time is set to 9 O clock on December 1 the time is set back to 8 O clock December 1 The daylight savings time adjustment function is set using year month day and time Set the time for every year The year is specified using the lower two digits
162. data file and report data file Real time monitor function Monitor the measured computed data on RD MV Omega private protocol is used suonesiioeds 14 9 14 6 Specifications of Optional Functions Alarm Output Relays A1 A2 A3 An alarm signal is output from the rear panel as a relay contact signal A1 and A2 includes remote control functions R1 Relay contact rating 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 A 250 VDC 0 1 A for resistance load Terminal configuration SPDT NO C NC Energized at alarm deenergized at alarm AND OR and hold non hold actions are selectable Batch Function BT1 Information added to the measured computed data Serial number of the RD MV Application name Supervisor name Manager name Batch number Lot number Comment information Identifying operators users by using the key login function User names that are already registered cannot be specified The combinations of user IDs and passwords that are identical to those that have been registered in the past cannot be specified Messages Messages 1 through 3 can be changed in the operation mode Confirming the stored data Batch information can be shown on the memory information display Serial Communication Interface C2 C3 This interface allows the host computer to control and make settings for the recorder as well as receive data from the recorder Connection EIA RS 232 C2 or RS 422 A 485 C3 Protocols Omega
163. data in the internal memory falls to the specified time the relay is energized e When the type of data to be acquired is event data only In the Free mode the relay is energized when the remaining time for storing the event data in the internal memory falls to the specified time In the Trigger or Rotate mode the relay is not energized There is no alarm output e Relay behavior energized on memory end LA L IZ NO c NC NO c NC NO c NC Normal Memory end Power off NO C and NC denote normally opened common and normally closed respectively For the setting procedure see section 10 6 1 26 1 8 Other Functions Remote Control Function R1 Option When a contact or open collector signal is applied to the remote control terminal a predetermined operation is carried out Arbitrary controls can be assigned to the eight remote control terminals The available controls are listed below For the setting procedure see section 10 7 SUON OUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 Function Remote Signal Operation None No operation Start Stop Edge Start stop acquiring data to the internal memory gt Sections 8 4 and 8 5 Trigger Trigger Trigger to start acquiring event data to the internal memory valid only when event data are specified to be acquired to the internal memory and the trigger used to start the acquisition is set to key trigger gt Section 8 11 Alarm ACK Trigger Release alarm display relay outpu
164. de e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Twice press the softkey Next 1 3 To display the setting screen press the soft key o 1 First CH 1 Last cH far Math 0n Calculation expression 1 Span_Lower Span_Upper Unit 200 00 200 00 Alare Type Value Rly No 1 on H 6 08 fon for 2 fort 3 off 4 ort 2 3 4 5 6 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here the Math range is also simultaneously set 2 On Off Turn the alarm On enabled Items 3 4 and 5 are displayed On Use alarm Off Do not use alarm 11 12 11 5 Setting the Alarm Explanation 3 Type Set the alarm type H Upper limit alarm L Lower limit alarm T Delay upper limit alarm t Delay lower limit alarm Note If you select delay alarm T or t for the alarm type you must set the alarm delay period See section 6 3 4 Value Set the value at which the alarm is activated Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter
165. delete the directory The directory name is cleared from the Directory name frame To cancel the delete operation select No and press the DISP ENTER key Note _ __ If the ESC key is pressed in the middle of the operation the screen returns to the Save Load Clear Data menu 9 10 9 5 Managing Files Displaying Free Space on the External Storage Medium Formatting the External Storage Medium In the Setting Mode Formats the external storage medium The function is the same as the formatting the Procedure Explanation external storage medium in the basic setting mode e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate posiwion Press the softkey Next 1 3 Press soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press the softkey Next 1 3 Press soft key to display the Format screen Format Volume nane i Type Quick 1 To change the volume name after formatting enter the new volume name Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string up to 11 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Note The following character combinations cannot be used as volume names AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK All spaces are not allowed for volume nam
166. displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key Select the group using the up and down arrow keys Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the selected group To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Changing the group on the display screen using the arrow keys 1 The displayed group changes in the order Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 and so on by pressing the right arrow key on the trend digital and bar graph screens By pressing the left arrow key the displayed group changes in the reverse order Automatically switch the displayed groups stop the automatic switching The displayed group on the trend digital and bar graph displays can be automatically switched at the specified interval In each display the displayed group rotates from group 1 to group 4 You can select 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s and 1 min for the switch interval For the procedure related to setting the switch interval see section 7 13 l 2 On the trend digital and bar graph displays press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu To close the sub menu that you opened press the left arrow 4 7 su 1995 uopesado HuyIMS gt 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens 3 To enable automatic switching select AUTO SCROLL ON using the up and down arrow keys To disable automatic switching select AUTO SCROLL OF
167. e Functions ABS SQR LOG EXP TLOG MAX TLOG MIN TLOG P P TLOG SUM TLOG AVE Power xx Logical negation NOT Multiplication and division x Addition and subtraction Greater than less than GT LT GE LE Equal not equal EQ NE Logical AND AND Logical OR exclusive OR OR XOR lower precedence Displaying the Computed Result The computed data of computation channels can be displayed in each operation screen Displaying the waveform and bar graph The data are displayed in the range defined by the upper and lower limits of the span For the settings related to displaying the computed result see sections below Set computation channels See section 11 4 Assign channels to groups See section 7 6 Display tags See sections 7 1 and 7 2 Set the channel display color See section 7 8 Use zone display See section 7 9 Set the number of scale divisions See section 7 10 11 1 Overview of the Computation Function Rolling Average Alarm Set the base position of the bar graph See section 7 10 Specify the scale display position See section 7 10 Use partial expansion display See sections 7 11 and 7 12 Numerical display The range of displayed values of computed data is from 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point The decimal point position corresponds to the position of the decimal point of the upper and lower limit span of the computation channel Howe
168. e RD MV102 RD MV104 Signal damping On off selectable for each channel Time constant selectable from 2 5 and 10 seconds RD MV106 RD MV112 Moving average On off selectable for each channel Number of samples to be averaged is selectable from 2 to 16 14 1 suonesiioeds fa 14 1 Input Specifications Computation Differential computation Between any two channels Linear scaling Square root Available for Volt TC RTD and DI ranges Available for Volt TC RTD and DI ranges Scaling limits 30000 to 30000 Decimal point user selectable Engineering unit user definable up to 6 characters Square root computation and linear scaling Available for Volt range Scaling limits 30000 to 30000 Decimal point user selectable Engineering unit user definable up to 6 characters 14 2 14 2 Display Specifications Display unit Channel display color Trend screen Bar graph screen 5 5 inch TFT color LCD VGA 320 x 240 dot resolution Trend Bar graph Selectable from 16 colors Red Green Blue Blue violet Brown Orange Yellow green Lightblue Violet Gray Lime Cyan Darkblue Yellow Light Gray Purple Initial settings of channel display color Channel 1 Red Channel 2 Green Channel 3 Blue Channel 4 Blue violet Channel 5 Brown Channel 6 Orange Channel 7 Yellow green Channel 8 Light blue Channel 9 violet Channel 10 Gray Channel 11
169. e section 4 2 Releasing the key lock This operation is carried out in the operation mode 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Keylock soft key A window appears for you to enter the password suonouny 194 0 2 3 Enter the password and press the DISP ENTER key The password is set in the basic setting mode See section 10 2 For the procedures related to entering Free is not selectable character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 The key lock is released 10 1 10 2 Setting the Key Lock Function Basic Setting Mode Procedure Select whether or not to enable the key lock on the individual keys and the external storage medium The initial setting is Free disabled on all parameters e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys e The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Press the softkey Next 1 3 To display the setting screen press the soft key O l Keylock 1 Hertot IEG START Free 2 Password STOP Free MENU Free MEDIA Free DISP ENTER Free 3 Alarm ACK Free
170. e Display Data and Event Data Function to Acquire Other Dattac c scccsicctscccsstecsssccatscasessacsscsscdeaesenactasassiesacsestsssuasertiens Function that Saves the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium 8 10 Acquiring Display Dalasan a tet meester artical 8 12 Acquiring Event Data Saving the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium 00 8 15 Setting the Auto Save Interval for the Display Data 0 0 ec eee cence eine 8 18 Setting the File Header Directory Name and the Saved Data during Manual Save 8 20 Setting the Channels to Display the Trend and Acquire the Data Basic Setting Mode 8 22 Setting the Method of the Display Event Data Acquisition Basic Setting Mode Storing Measured Computed Data at Arbitrary Times Manual Sampling 06 Managing Files and Initializing Data gi 9 2 9 3 9 4 Saving Loading Setup Data c iccsccccccsccacsesscascessssntssstesnesessecssavssssacescessstssavaccastssscnecsantssnteaes 9 1 Saving Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium Using Key Operation i icccciccccdacsacsctecascncacecteseeeneviecaccasntdvasseceti acsiaicvaciansstersizteetenerenensrcneces 9 5 Viewing Display Data in the External Storage Medium cccccecsereeeseeseeseesseeseeteeeness 9 6 Viewing Event Data in the External Storage Medium c cece eee ee eee ee ene eens 9 7 Contents 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 Managing Files Disp
171. e ENEY 1 1 1 2 Functions of the Input Section icsse ara aE en aeaa ERARE 1 2 1 3 Display FUNGUO M seca cetcsiitcetgsecd shane eecavdaczeesscleeens i ezatey eeeeiecslaldaedebddiivastgneedaigie enini 1 5 14 Storage FUNCUOM sasen inane swaspaane dxctactentuscehsesscinesduecs sactacensaecdasdenanceatecie 1 15 1 5 Alarm Function 1 6 Computation Function and Report Function M1 Option esscr 1 20 1 8 Sioe FUNCHONS ix isc55c2cc c0cccscedsceneshescueces E ce feSees ce dena feesasciecacanssasecesesaseagaae iveaeaceese 1 24 Before Using the Recorder 2 1 Precautions on the Use of the Recorder 2 2 Installing the Recorder o ciccis cccccccccccsssssccsacseccasscasesescaccastesseveccaccastensivectaasssacsastscesasnsccaternes 2 3 INPUESIQMAl WINING ss secs cseccsss ccsccescceseeeceesevcecagevaee ceessetestovsesatecnencesestssedestveacasestiendtneaeseerses 2 4 Alarm Output Wiring A1 to A3 Option 0 0 0 eee eeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeseeseaeeseeeeaeeseneeneneeeaees 2 7 2 5 FAIL Memory End Wiring F 1 Option nieve acetic etic net 2 9 2 6 Remote Control Wiring R1 Opto sisi ceiveiscceescrecctecscecnsaetdtene set becend eree 2 11 2 7 Power SUP DIY WIRING ono 2525 22 a a r a a e aa a aE ra ae E A a ER 2 13 Names of Parts Run Mode Common Operations 3 1 Names Of Pars and FUNCHONS aiieieo iae iania edt Oa r a aai iA iS 3 1 3 2 Turning ON OFF the Power SWIC cciescectcctecsccctetesetetdvtisesstveeceestelvtessacteenst naiai 3 4 3 3 Inserting Removing
172. e Internal Memory the following types of data can be stored on the external storage medium Setting data The RD MV100 setting data such as the setting of the functions of the input section as described in section 1 2 can also be stored to an external storage medium to the specified file name The stored data can also be loaded and used by the RD MV100 e Image data of the display screen The image data of the display screen can be stored to the external storage medium The image data can be pasted to documents created on a PC Saving Data via Ethernet The display data event data and report data as described in Acquiring Data to the Internal Memory can be automatically transferred to an FTP server via Ethernet for storage Conversely the RD MV100 can operate as an FTP server The RD MV100 can be accessed from a PC and the data in the external storage medium can be retrieved for storage For these functions see the RD MV100 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 1 5 Alarm Function This function generates an alarm when the measured computed data meets a certain condition When an alarm occurs information notifying the alarm occurrence is displayed on the screen In addition a signal can be output from the relay output terminals on the rear panel of the RD MV100 only on models with the optional alarm output relay function A1 through A3 Alarm indication The alarm conditions are displayed as alar
173. e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press ew Press Press the soft key Next 1 3 To display the setting screen press the soft key O l AUX for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Tag Channel CADE 1 Hemory alarm oe Language English Partial Not The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Tag Channel Select Tag or Channel Tag Display tags Channel Display channel numbers Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Note __ If a channel is set to display the tag but the tag name is not entered the channel will display the channel number 7 2 7 3 Setting the Display Rate Trend Procedure Explanation The time period corresponding to 1 division on the time axis on the trend display is specified The time axis on the trend display is determined by the display rate The sampling interval of the display data is also determined by the display rate The display rate cannot be changed while data sampling is in progress
174. e User Name MESSAGES Jan S 2088 22 40 55 useri POER OFF Jan 03 2000 22 40 48 user Cursor ress Tan 2000 22 39 30 user MEEA Jan 200 22 39 23 useri POER CN Jan 03 200 22 30 17 user MESEL Jan 03 200 22 30 12 useri Memory Summary The information pertaining to the display data file and event data file in the internal memory is displayed Display data correspond to the data on the trend display Event data are data acquired to the internal memory according to the specified sampling interval and data collection period The data are separate from the display data In addition the number of manual sampled data TLOG data option and report data option residing in the internal memory are displayed For models that have the alarm output relays option the ON OFF state of the relays are also listed For details related to the data residing in the internal memory see section 1 4 By selecting the display data file or event data file using the arrow keys the historical trend display can be recalled For a description on the historical trend display see Historical Trend in this section For the operating procedure see section 4 5 Number of data sets in the internal memory The maximum number of data sets the internal memory can hold Date and time the newest data were acquired Status of alarm output relays M SAMPLE DATA 00 50 Raw amanann Red Activated TLOG aTa ogaao REPORT DATA 0
175. e a supply voltage in the range 132 to 180 VAC as this may have adverse effects on the measurement accuracy Connection procedure 1 Check that the recorder is turned OFF 2 Connect the power cable supplied with the recorder to the power connector on the rear panel of the recorder 3 Connect the other end of the power cord to a socket that meets the requirements 2 13 Jop109eyY oy Husn a10jog e 2 7 Power Supply Wiring 12 VDC Power Supply Model Using AC adapter Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument A Connect the power wires after checking that the power supply is turned off to prevent electric shock e To prevent electric shock or fire always use the power cable supplied by Omega e Before connecting the power cord check that the voltage on the supply side matches with the voltage rating of this recorder e When not using the instrument for a long time unplug the power cord of the AC adapter e Only use the AC adapter from Omega Part No B9230ZW e Do not put objects on top of the AC adapter or the power cord Also do not let heat generating objects come in contact with them e When unplugging the power cord do not pull on the power cord Always hold the plug If the power cord becomes damaged contact your nearest representative listed on the back cover of this manual Connecting Procedure 1 Check that the power switch is turned OFF 2 Connect
176. e and on any correspondence The purchaser is responsible for shipping charges freight insurance and proper packaging to prevent breakage in transit FOR WARRANTY RETURNS please have the FOR NON WARRANTY REPAIRS consult OMEGA following information available BEFORE for current repair charges Have the following contacting OMEGA information available BEFORE contacting OMEGA 1 Purchase Order number under which the product 1 Purchase Order number to cover the COST was PURCHASED of the repair 2 Model and serial number of the product under 2 Model and serial number of the product and warranty and 3 Repair instructions and or specific problems 3 Repair instructions and or specific problems relative to the product relative to the product OMEGA s policy is to make running changes not model changes whenever an improvement is possible This affords our customers the latest in technology and engineering OMEGA is a registered trademark of OMEGA ENGINEERING INC Copyright 2000 OMEGA ENGINEERING INC All rights reserved This document may not be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form in whole or in part without the prior written consent of OMEGA ENGINEERING INC Where Do Find Everything Need for Process Measurement and Control OMEGA Of Course Shop online at www omega com TEMPERATURE 4 Thermocouple RTD amp Thermistor Probes Connectors Pane
177. e day is rounded off Greater than or equal to 60 minutes less than 100 hours hours unit less than one hour is rounded off Less than 60 minutes minutes unit less than one minute is rounded off n 16 The maximum number of display data files that can be written to the internal memory is 16 16 represents this value n represents the number of files in the internal memory One file contains data that are acquired between start and stop operations su 195 uopesado BulyosyMs gt The display data are overwritten for the following cases Be aware of these cases because data that are overwritten are lost When the display data storage area in the internal memory becomes full In such case Overwrite is displayed in the status display section When the number of files that remains to be saved to the external medium exceeds 16 6 The usage condition of the event data storage area in the internal memory This is displayed when event data acquisition is enabled Note When the trigger mode is set to Free e Bar graph Displays the used space of the event data storage area Time period The remaining time for acquiring the event data When the remaining time is less than one hour the time is displayed in units of minutes Remaining memory Unit refer to item Greater than or equal to 100 days 1 Greater than or equal to 100 hours less than 100 days days Greater than or equal to 60 minutes less tha
178. e displayed groups can be automatically switched at 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s or 1 min intervals Channel number of tag display The channels can be displayed as channel number or tags The setting applies to all channels For the procedure related to the selecting the channel display or tag display see section 7 2 For the procedure related to setting the tags see section 7 1 1 5 1 3 Display Function Trend Screen Displays the waveform of the measured and computed data The direction of the waveform display can be set to horizontal or vertical For details related to the display method see section 4 3 Trend display Rekap IP 1 01 04 G6 uit Scale n div Display update rate Time div Message Trip line Channel Tag Measured computed value y v v Unit REM M 8 oo fl Alarm mark T Numerical display section Waveform of all channels t Data of selected group Updating the waveform and updating the numerical display One division on the RD MV100 consists of 30 dots on the LCD The displayed waveform is updated at an interval corresponding to one dot This interval is determined by the time period corresponding to one division referred to as the display update rate The relationship between the display update rate and the speed of movement of waveforms is as follows Display
179. e has been no key operation for a certain amount of time The screen will return to the original brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence The initial setting is Off These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Press the soft key Next 1 3 Press the soft key as To display the setting screen press the soft key Oom Leb Brightness Saver on Time ih Restore Key Alm AON The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Setting the brightness of the screen 1 Brightness Select from 1 to 8 A higher number corresponds to a brighter screen setting Setting the backlight saver 2 On Off When On is selected Saver time and Restore boxes are displayed 3 Saver time Select the time from 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 30 min and 1 hour If the specified time elapses without any key operation the LCD backlight is automatically dimmed 4 Restore Select Key or Key Alm Key Alarm Key The screen will return to the original brightness with a key operation Key Alar
180. e input character Use the M1 M2 soft key to switch the function of the window between number input and computing element input See the explanation Each time the M1 M2 soft key is pressed the function of the window switches between number input and computing element input The selected function is displayed to the top of the soft key display section M1 Number is selected M2 Computing element is selected Del soft key Delete the character at the cursor position Bs soft key Delete the character before the cursor position Ins soft key Switch between insert and overwrite Each time the Ins soft key is pressed insert and overwrite switches The selected function is displayed to the right of the soft key display section Over Overwrites the cursor position Ins Inserts at the cursor position Note When using TLOG computation timers must be set in the basic setting mode and the number of the timer and the sum unit only for TLOG SUM must be set in the setting mode 4 Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range given below and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Allowed range 9999999 to 99999999 The decimal can be set in the following positions
181. e marks When the scale is divided into 4 or 5 section the area between the main scale marks is divided further into 10 sections using small and medium marks When the scale is divided into 6 to 12 sections the area between the main scale marks is divided further into 5 sections using small marks However small marks are not displayed for the following cases When the measurement computation range resolution is smaller than the total number of sections created by small marks When zone display is used When partial expanded display is used 7 17 Aejdsig oy Bulyesado pue Huas 7 10 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend Scale values The scale values are displayed at all main scale marks when the scale is divided into 4 to 7 sections using the main scale marks When the scale is divided into 8 to 12 sections the scale values are displayed at every other main scale mark In addition the upper or lower limit of the scale is displayed at the end of the scale Rule 1 Up to 3 digits excluding the minus sign can be displayed for the scale values Rule 2 If the integer section of either value at the end of the scale is less than or equal to one digit the value is displayed as _ or 071 Example 1 If the scale is set to 0 05 to 0 5 the scale display for the upper and lower limits is 0 0 to 0 5 Example 2 If the scale is set to 0 005 to 0 05 the scale display for
182. e measured data such as the difference square root and scaling The input type and computation are configured as an input mode on the RD MV100 For the procedure related to setting the different modes see sections 5 1 to 5 7 Input Mode Notation Description DC voltage Thermocouple Resistance temperature detector ON OFF input Difference Square root Scaling Skip Volt TC RTD DI Delta Sqrt Scale Skip Measures a DC voltage in the range 20 mV to 20 V Measures the temperature corresponding to the appropriate range for R S B K E J T N W L and U Measures the temperature corresponding to the appropriate range for Pt100 JPt100 Cu10 and CU25 Displays the contact input or voltage input signals by correlating them to 0 or 100 of the display range Contact input Closed contact is ON 1 Open contact is OFF 0 Voltage input Less than 2 4 V is OFF 0 Greater than or equal to 2 4 V is ON 1 When the input type is set to DC voltage thermocouple RTD or ON OFF input the value obtained by subtracting the measured value of another channel this channel is called a reference channel from the input signal of the channel set to compute the difference is displayed as the measured value of that channel When the input type is set to DC voltage the square root of the input signal of the channel set to compute t
183. e medium using key operations initialize the internal memory and other operations 10 Other Functions Describes how to set and operate key lock key login logout and other functions 11 Computation Report Function Option Describes how to use the optional computation report function 12 Troubleshooting Describes the error messages and the troubleshooting measures of the recorder 13 Maintenance Describes fuse replacement and other information 14 Specifications Describes the specifications of the recorder Appendix Describes the initial values of the setting mode and basic setting mode file formats of ASCII files Index Note This manual covers information regarding RD MV100s that have a language code 2 English vii How to Use this Manual Conventions Used in this Manual Unit Kies Denotes 1024 Example 768 KB File capacity Kesiti Denotes 1000 M Denotes 1024K Example 1 2 MB Storage capacity of floppy disks Busi Bytes Example 1 2 MB Storage capacity of floppy disks Symbols The following symbols are used in this manual A Affixed to the instrument Indicates danger to personnel or instrument and the operator must refer to the User s Manual The symbol is used in the User s Manual to indicate the reference WARNING Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent injury or death to the
184. e new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Mode Type Range Measurable Range Scale Volt See section 5 1 Voltage Input Setting TC See section 5 2 Thermocouple TC Resistance Temperature Detector RTD Setting RTD See section 5 2 Thermocouple TC Resistance Temperature Detector RTD Setting DI See section 5 3 Digital Input DI Setting 5 10 5 6 Square Root Computation Setting Procedure Computes the square root of the DC voltage input The result can be scaled to a value in the appropriate unit and displayed Set the upper and lower limits of the input s display span the upper and lower limits after scaling and the unit The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press mew To display the setting screen press the soft key ot 1 First CH far Last cH far i Range Eo
185. e recorder checks whether or not an external storage medium is inserted in the drive When the external storage medium does not have enough space Change the external storage medium to save the remaining data ih The message Exchange media to continue the saving operation will be displayed Change the external storage medium and press MEDIA key The message Do you want to continue to save measured data will be displayed 2 Selecting Yes and pressing the DISP ENTER key saves the remaining data to the external storage medium Selecting No and pressing the DISP ENTER key does not save the remaining data Note ____ The data saving operation is interrupted in five minutes after the message Exchange media to continue was displayed The message Memory save to media was interrupted will be displayed in this case The remaining data can be saved to the external storage medium by another manual save operation winipay abe10 sg jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eead 8 7 Saving the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium Explanation Name of the directory to which to save the data For the setting procedure of the directory to which to save the data see section 8 9 Each time the storage medium is inserted into the drive and the data are saved the sequence number of the directory name increments by one Example When the specified directory name is DATAO the first set of data are saved to
186. e report started Date and time the report was created Status of data Note When new report data are created while displaying the report data the screen is not updated The most recent report data can be displayed by carrying out the following operations e Press the DISP ENTER key and display the report data again from the menu Press the right arrow key su 19 5 uopesado BulyosyuMs gt 4 6 Using the Historical Trend Operation Flow Diagram HISTORICAL TREND Screen menu A i i ALARM SUMMARY MESSAGE SUMMARY MEMORY SUMMARY LOAD DISPLAY DATA lt gt Moving the cursor Screen menu Sub menu mi lt gt gt v Memory information Group channels All channels Expanding reducing the time axis LOAD EVENT DATA Procedure Screen menu Sub menu DISP ENTER key 4 lt gt Arrow keys There are 6 methods in displaying the historical trend screen e From the alarm summary See section 4 5 e From the message summary See section 4 5 e From the memory summary See section 4 5 From Load display data See section 9 3 e From Load event data See section 9 4 e Recall from the screen menu Described in this section Displaying the historical trend screen from the screen menu Of the data being samp
187. e section 1 3 1 21 SUONJOUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 This page intentionally left blank 1 22 This page intentionally left blank SUOI OUNZ JO MAIAIOAO 7 1 23 1 8 Other Functions Key Lock Key Login Logout Key lock is a function that locks key operations removal of the Zip disk and the saving of data to the external storage medium during manual save mode A password needs to be entered to release the key lock For the setting and operating procedure see section 10 2 and 10 1 respectively Items and behaviors of the key lock can be set individually Item Behavior during Key Lock START key Disabled STOP key Disabled MENU key Disabled MEDIA key Disabled DISP ENTER key Switching operation screens is disabled Alarm ACK soft key Disabled Math Computation Math START softkey Disabled option Math STOP soft key Disabled option Math reset soft key Disabled option Write memory Message soft key Disabled Manual sample soft key Disabled Trigger soft key Disabled Save Display soft key Disabled Save Event soft key Disabled Media External storage medium During manual save Prevent Zip disk removal 1 Set together by Math parameter 2 Set together by Write memory parameter This function allows only certain users to access the recorder The users are distinguished by their name user IDs and passwords You can select wh
188. e setting mode e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press ew Press Press the soft key Next 1 3 To display the setting screen press the soft key Oo AUX for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Tag Channel Channel Hemory alarm ih Language English Partial E The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Partial Select Use or Not Use Partial expansion display can be set in the setting mode Not Partial expansion display cannot be set Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 7 22 7 13 Setting the Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width Grid and Scroll Time Procedure The display direction of the trend and bar graph can be set to horizontal or vertical The background color used in the trend digital bar graph and summary displays
189. e the table below Display Update 1min 2min Smin 10min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h Rate DIV Sampling 2 4 10 20 40 60 120 240 480 interval s Auto save 10min 10min 10min 10min interval choices 20min 20min 20min 20min 30min 30min 30min 30min th th 1h th th 1h th 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h iday 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day iday 1day 1 day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 10 day 10day 10 day 10day 10 day 10 day 14 day 14 day 14day 14day 14 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day wnp n 6e e10 s jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eead e 8 9 Setting the File Header Directory Name and the Saved Data during Manual Save Procedure File header Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be used to write a header comment to the display data event data manual sample data TLOG data option and report data option Directory name When saving data to the external storage medium you can specify the name of the directory to which the files are to be saved All data other than the setup data display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data option report data option and screen image data are saved to this directory Setup data are saved to the root directory Saved data during
190. eaqnos D 12 1 A List of Messages Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref Section 90 No permission to enter to the SETUP mode See sections 10 3 and 10 4 91 Password is incorrect See sections 10 1 and 10 3 92 Press ESC key to change to the operation mode Press the ESC key 100 IP address doesn t belong to class A B or C See Communication Interface User s Manual 101 The result of the masked IP address is all Os or 1s See Communication Interface User s Manual 102 SUBNET mask is incorrect See Communication Interface User s Manual 103 The net part of default gateway is not equal to that of IP address See Communication Interface User s Manual 104 FTP client failed because the memory mode is manual See Communication Interface User s Manual e Execution Errors Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref Section 150 This action is not possible because sampling is in progress See sections 8 5 and 8 6 151 This action is not possible during sampling or calculating See sections 8 5 8 6 and 11 3 152 This action is not possible because saving is in progress Wait till the saving ends 153 This action is not possible because formatting is in progress Wait till the formatting ends 155 The message is not written while sampling is stopped See sections 8 5 and 8 6 160 Cannot load the specified data Change the memory setting See sections 4 5 9 3 and 9
191. easures Ref Section 232 There is no available data This message may appear when recalling historical trend Access to other files 233 The specified historical data do not exist This message may appear when recalling historical trend See section 4 5 234 The specified channel is not assigned to the display group This message may appear when switching to trend or bar graph from overview See sections 4 4 and 7 6 12 2 12 1 A List of Messages e Errors Related to FTP Client For information regarding the FTP client function of this recorder see the RD MV100 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 Code Message 280 IP address is not set or FTP function is not available Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 280 Character String and Details HOSTADDR The recorder s IP address has not been specified Check the IP address DORMANT Internal processing error LINK Data link is disconnected Check the cable connection 281 FTP mail box operation error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 281 Character String and Details MAIL nternal processing error STATUS nternal processing error TIMEOUT nternal processing error PRIORITY nternal processing error NVRAM nternal processing error 282 FTP control connection error Further details are provided by the character
192. ed The release operation is void if the behavior of the indicator or the output relay is set to non hold The release operation can be executed via remote control option or via communications Alarm indication The alarm condition can be confirmed with the alarm icon in the status display section and the alarm indication on the operation screen such as the trend display The indicator pattern varies depending on the hold non hold setting The alarm icon in the status display section Alarm icon Indicator Hold Non hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Red icon Released No icon displayed Hold Activated Blinking red icon Stops blinking with alarm ACK Released Blinking green icon icon disappears with alarm ACK When the alarm indication is set to non hold alarm ACK does not work 6 1 suuely Pumas pue Huibpea mouyoy K 6 1 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay Option Non hold Hold Activated Activated Alarm Released Released Blinking red i Red icon icon i Red icon Blinking red Blinking green pp icon a icon j p Indication No icon No icon Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Alarm indication in the trend display ki Dae R DFF Im n div Ea KG p owe g ROWER D gt a 1 F 3 4 Alarmtype R 8 051 H_ 852H 8 859 B53
193. ed For the operating procedure see sections 8 4 and 8 6 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Explanation About group display and all channel display The group display of trend digital and bar graph and the all channel display of the trend are displayed in the following fashion see table below They depend on whether channels are assigned to the groups and whether the channels are set to display the trend and set to store the data Assigned to Trend Display Data Numerical Display Trend s Waveform Display Data Acquisition to the Groups Storage Specification Bar Graph Group All Channels Internal Memory Yes Yes Display Display Display Yes Yes No Display Don t display Don t display No No Yes Don t display Don t display Display Yes No No Don t display Don t display Don t display No 1 Numerical display refers to the numerical display of trend digital and bar graph displays The numerical display of trend digital and bar graph displays and the bar graph display are updated at all times when they are displayed It is not affected by whether or not the waveform of the trend display is shown The waveform of the trend display is updated at the display update rate For the procedure related to setting the display update rate see section 7 3 Setting the Display Update Rate Trend For the procedure related to setting the channel to display the trend and to store the data
194. ed to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 8 Password Enter the password up to 6 alphanumeric characters Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Note For models with the batch function BT1 option the combinations of user IDs and passwords that are identical to those that have been registered by any user in the past cannot be specified See Confirming operation below 9 Enter setup Select whether or not to allow the login user to enter the basic setting mode Enable The user can enter the basic setting mode Disable The user can not enter the basic setting mode Note The Enter Setup of all users cannot be set to Disabled If specified the user with the lowest registration number with the fifth parameter turned On is automatically set to Enabled The setting is changed when the setup data is stored and the basic setting mode is terminated suonouny 1934 0 2 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key For models without the batch function BT1 option e Ifthe user name already exists a confirmation message This username is already registered is displayed At this point the user name is confirmed confirmed but not yet registered If necessary change
195. eeceeeeseeeseeeseaeeeseeteaeeeneeeeasesaees Explanation ot Computing EQUATIONS isisisi ivora Using the Computation Function ecceeeceeeseeeeeeeneeeeneeeereseeeesneeeeeeeseeeseaeesnaeeeneeeeeenaes Setting Computation Channels c cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesesaeeeeeeaeeeeeaaes SO UMIMG TS Alane e EEE E E EEEE tines Setting COMSTAIMMS sieniniai a ea aE E EA AANE EEEE EAEE aE NESE TLOG Computation Setting the Timer Number and Sum Unit for TLOG Computation Setting the Timer Basic Setting Mode essesssesseseseesirsreesrnrrnsrnrnnrrnsrnrrnnnrnnrnnsrnnenn Using the Rolling Average 0 Overview of the Report Function Using the Report FUMCHON oc ccccccicceccdbesce cascnc tices aeee aaaea Oaa E TAASEN Setting the Report Function Chapter 12 Troubleshooting 12 1 12 2 A List Of MESSAGES s ccscscccccctsscasscsivessesssestesconsscvarsavasecsnscsstadseuasessseasensivectestssecsasesacvarnavbessss 12 1 Troubleshooting Flow Chatt 0i icccccesccsscesccssesicsacececssntescssacsesusnevcisascvasdestteacasatsbesszsasasars 12 8 Chapter 13 Maintenance 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 Periodic MAMENANG ccsiscc eserciveeueaeesteieivauesed tw wendl desnsetaceneasedidtcadniiz tered dlereceeeeteentveaiey 13 1 Replacing TMG FUSE iernare pa a E ae RE a E toast AA OE RIERA 13 2 erell olEN eln a e A A E E E E ta a oveeesteers 13 3 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts s sseeseessesseesres
196. eference junction compensation for the thermocouple input As the measurement terminal of the recorder is generally at room temperature the actual output of the thermocouple is different from the values given on the thermoelectromotive force table based on 0 C The recorder measures the temperature of the terminal and makes adjustments by calculation Therefore when the measurement terminals are shorted equivalent to 0 C at the detector tip the temperature at the measurement terminal is displayed When calibrating the RD MV100 this compensation voltage thermoelectromotive force of 0 C reference corresponding to the input terminal temperature must be subtracted from the output of the standard generator before application As shown in the figure by using a Model T MJ reference junction pot to compensate the reference junction at 0 C you can input the thermoelectromotive force of 0 C reference from the standard generator and make the calibration 13 4 13 4 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts To maintain the reliability of the recorder and to use it in good working order for a long time we recommend periodic replacement of worn parts as preventive maintenance The recommended replacement periods for worn parts are shown in the following table The replacement periods apply when the recorder is operated under standard operating conditions Please consider the actual operating conditions when determining the act
197. eflash alarm is specified relays 101 to 103 are used as reflash relays regardless of the number of alarm output relays Therefore relays 101 to 103 operate as OR logic see AND OR of alarm output relays and non hold see Hold Non hold operation of the alarm output relay regardless of the settings made in AND OR of alarm output relays and Hold Non hold operation of the alarm output relay suuely Pumas pue Huibpea mouyoy 6 4 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function Basic Setting Mode AND OR of alarm output relays When sharing an alarm output relay among multiple alarms you can select from the following conditions that cause the alarm output relay to be activated e AND Activated when all alarms are being generated simultaneously e OR Activated when at least one of the alarms is being generated Specify the alarm output relay to operate under the AND condition as in I01 first relay to Ixx where xx is the relay number The initial setting is set to None Channel 1 T o I Alarm status i 1 channe A i l l D l I gt cf mo a l I I wie L Alarm relay status Note If the reflash alarm is turned ON 101 to 103 operates as reflash alarms They are fixed to OR logic operation Specifying AND produces no effect Energize de energize operation of the alarm output relay You can select whether to energize or de energize the alarm output relay when t
198. eform is displayed between the Upper and Lower limits The Upper and Lower limits are set as percentages of the display span e Lower 0 to 95 Upper 5 to 100 Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 7 13 Aejdsig y Buneiado pue Huas 7 9 Using Zone Displays Trend Note Lower must be a smaller value than Upper The width of the zone upper limit lower limit must be greater than or equal to 5 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 7 14 7 10 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend Procedure The scale used on trend and bar graphs can be set When the bar graph is displayed horizontally the base position of the bar graph can be set on each channel by selecting either normal or center Normal The left edge or the right edge of the display span depending on which value is smaller Center Position at 50 of the display span For the procedures to set the vertical or horizontal display see section 7 13 The scale display position for each c
199. emory to the external storage medium Here data refers to display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data option and report data option When Using Manual Save Procedure The operation to save data in the internal memory to the external storage medium can be carried out when the storage medium is inserted into the drive 1 Insert the storage medium into the drive and press MEDIA key A window with a confirming message Do you want to save measured data appears 2 Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER Key to save data Select No using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key not to save data Note You can select whether to save all the data residing in the internal memory or only the data that have not been saved to the storage medium See section 8 10 If saving to the storage medium is prevented with the key lock function and the key lock is enabled data cannot be saved when the medium is inserted into the drive Turn OFF the key lock before inserting the medium It is possible that the data in the internal memory are overwritten before the data are stored to the external storage medium due to limitations such as the capacity of the internal memory Refer to sections 8 2 and 8 3 and save the data to the external storage medium before they are overwritten For the memory usage display of the internal memory see section 4 2 Using the Status Display Section When press MEDIA key th
200. en 3 Press 68 soft key to display the Delete screen Delete Directory File name Time i ET1 PNL 2000 01 01 00 2 File list PNL 2000 01 01 04 1 806 AAAG PNL 2000 01 02 00 53 a1 SET2 PNL 2000 01 01 00 35 882 SAITO PNL 2000 01 15 03 27 for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears 883 KATSU PNL 1999 89 14 15 4 R180 M L2H 1999 88 28 18 3 RSUBBB L2H 1999 88 17 22 56 Deleting files and directories can be excuted in the same procedure as that in the setting mode See page 9 9 Formatting the External Storage Medium In the Basic Setting Mode Procedure Formats the external storage medium The function is the same as that in the setting mode e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press Press the softkey Next 1 3 Press 8 soft key to display the Save Load Initialize menu screen for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Press 4 soft key to display the Format screen Format Volume name Type Quick i Formatting the external storage medium can be excuted in the same procedure as that in the setting mode See page 9 11 9 12 9 6 Saving the Screen Image Procedure Explanation The screen image that is displayed is saved to the external storage medium using the FUNC key operation The data size of the screen image is appr
201. er of display scale divisions 7 10 display the trend Scale position 7 10 applies also to e Zone display 7 9 computation channels that e Partial expansion display 7 11 data are to be acquired 8 10 Bar graph e Channel display color Applies also to trends 7 8 Number of scale divisions 7 10 Bar graph base position 7 10 TLOG computation Timer number to use sum unit 11 8 Timer mode absolute time relative time 11 9 e Interval time 11 9 Reference time for the absolute timer 11 9 e Turn ON OFF reset at each interval 11 9 e Turn ON OFF data saving to the storage medium 11 9 suoneiado UoWUOD epoyy UNY S 1ed JO SEWeN E Rolling average On Off 11 10 e Sampling interval e Number of samples Other settings Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Time Date time 3 7 Key lock 10 2 e Use Not use key lock Password Keys to lock enable disable the key lock Key login 10 4 e Use Not use key login e Auto logout On Off Use Not use user ID User name User ID Password Allow Prohibit basic setting mode Remote control Option 10 7 Action assignment on remote terminals Report Option 11 13 Report types Date Time of creation e Report channel assignments e Sum unit Display language 10 8 Daylight savings 10 12 Select the display language Date Time to switch Temperature 10 13 Temperature unit 3
202. er power is restored The report measured computed data up to the time of the power disruption are used For the next scheduled report data after the power recovery are used Before the time to create After power is restored report data are created at the time of the the report next normally scheduled report All measured computed data excluding the power disruption period are used How the measured computed data are handled when there is an abnormality in the data Type of Abnormal Data Report Data Average Value Maximum Minimum Value Integrated Value Positive overflow not used used not used Negative overflow not used used not used Error not used not used not used Displaying the Report Report data display The reports can be displayed from the Information Memory Summary menu in the operation mode See section 4 5 Status display If the data of a measurement or a computation channel enter any of the conditions listed below within the relevant time period one hour for hourly reports and one day for daily reports for example status E or O is output to the report In addition if a power failure occurred or the time was changed status P and C are output to the report respectively For the displayed position see the report data output example in section 4 5 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog 11 23 11 11 Overview of the Report Function Data Condition Status Common
203. ermocouple input When using the reference junction compensation of the RD MV100 see Precautions to be taken while wiring in section 2 3 Input Signal Wiring When using the external reference junction compensation set an appropriate reference junction compensation voltage As in the example in the following figure if the reference junction temperature for the external reference junction compensation is To C set the thermoelectromotive force of the 0 C reference for TO C as the reference junction compensation voltage An example of External reference junction compensation External reference junction compensation Maintain the junction between the thermocouple and the copper wire at To C Copper wire Thermocouple 5 16 Chapter 6 Acknowledging and Setting Alarms 6 1 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay Option Procedure Explanation This section describes the procedures to release the alarm indication and the output relay when the behavior of the indicator or the output relay is set to hold The indicator or output relay condition varies depending on the timing at which the alarm release operation is carried out This operation is carried out in the operation mode 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 To release the alarm indication and the output relay press the Alarm ACK soft The indications and output relays generated by all alarms are releas
204. es Spaces at the top or in the middle of a character string are also not allowed 2 Select Quick or Normal to set in the Type box To cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Clear data menu press the ESC key 3 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays a confirmation window Pressing the DISP ENTER key formats the medium Type Quick Performs only a logical format Normal Performs both a physical format and a logical format Format type Floppy disk 2HD 1 44 MB Zip disk FDISK 1 partition hard disk format ATA flash memory card FDISK 1 partition hard disk format Format time Type of Storage Media Quick Normal Note Floppy disk Approx 6 s Approx 1 min 30 s Zip disk Approx 3 s Approx 10 min ATA flash memory card Approx 3 s Approx 1 min 30 s 20 MB Approx 5 s Approx 6 min 160 MB 9 11 g eq BHuiziyeniuy pue saji4 Huibeuey el 9 5 Managing Files Displaying Free Space on the External Storage Medium Deleting Files and Directories on the External Storage Medium In the Basic Setting Mode Procedure Deletes files and directories on the external storage medium The function is the same as that in the setting mode e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press Press the softkey Next 1 3 Press soft key to display the Save Load Initialize menu scre
205. ese procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press mew To display the setting screen press the soft key Ooa ol 1 First CH far Last cH far 5 Range r l Hode Type Range Span L Span_U BA voit 2 2 008 2 000 Scale L Scale U Unit oa 200 00 2 3 4 6 7 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure i First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 2 Mode Set the mode to Scale 3 Type Select the input type from Volt TC RTD and DI 4 Range Select the input range using the soft keys according to the input type 5 Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Note Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value 5 9 sBuijes jauueyo jueweinseay 7
206. ess the softkey Next 1 3 Press the soft key l Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key Setting on a computation channel option To display the setting screen press the soft key 6 1 First CH fai Last CH far Zone Partial 2 Lower GEJ Expand 50 3 Upper 100 Boundary 6 BBG 4 Graph Division 4 Bar graph Normal Scale position 1 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here Zone and Graph are also simultaneously set 2 On Off When On is selected the Expand and Boundary boxes are displayed On Use the partial expansion display Off Not use the partial expansion display 3 Expand Boundary displacement position Set the position to which a particular value the boundary see step 4 in the display span is to be moved as a percentage of the display span Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter the position and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 The range for the position 1 to 99 7 20 7 11 Using Partial Expanded Display Trend 4 Boundary This is a value within the display span By moving the value within the display span to another position see ste
207. ether or not to use User IDs In addition you can set whether or not to allow operations in the basic setting mode for each user Up to 7 users can be registered For the setting and operating procedure see section 10 4 and 10 3 respectively 1 24 1 8 Other Functions Log Display System Screen A list of phenomena that occurred can be displayed in the order of occurrence for the following items Error messages 50 most recent messages A log of key login and logout 50 most recent logins A log of communication commands 200 most recent commands A log of file transfers using the FTP client function 50 most recent transfers For details related to the display format see section 10 5 Error log example Displays the date and time of the error occurrence error code number and the message The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen total number of logs Date and time of occurrence Error code Error message 885 885 Time No Message Jan 12 2088 68 36 47 281 Not enough free space on media Jan 12 2088 08 36 19 218 Media has not been inserted Jan 11 2088 04 15 38 885 The input numerical value exceeds the set range Jan 11 2088 04 15 28 85 The input numerical value exceeds the set range Jan 11 2088 83 23 19 681 Measured data have been initialized The total number of inputs on the RD MV100 the capacity of the internal memory the communication fun
208. ettings 5 1 Voltage Input Setting Procedure To measure the DC voltage input or the DC current input using an external shunt resistor follow the procedures below to set the voltage input The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw To display the setting screen press the soft key oat 1 First CH ERY Last cu far Range Node Range Span L Span_U Volt 2 2 008 2 088 aS 2 3 4 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 2 Mode Set the mode to Volt 3 Range Set the input range 4 Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Note Span lower limit and
209. event data are no longer acquired even if the trigger condition is met In this case save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium Terminate data acquisition with a key operation in sync with the termination of the display data acquisition when acquiring the display data and the event data 1 Press the STOP key A confirmation window opens On models with the computation option the confirmation window displays the following choices Mem Math terminate acquisition and all computations Memory terminate acquisition and Cancel 2 Select Yes Mem Math or Memory for models with the computation function using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key to stop the data acquisition The icon in the status display section changes to a stop icon Note ____ e One file is created for one set of start and stop operations The maximum number of files that can be stored in the internal memory is the specified number of blocks When a power disruption occurs the file is closed When the power resumes data are written to a new file Memory write operation can also be started or stopped via remote control or communication commands e The START STOP operation also starts stops the report function e When the computation is stopped it is started with the START key 8 14 8 7 Saving the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium This operation saves the data in the internal m
210. example if the computation is started at 9 30 the time expiration will occur at 09 40 09 50 10 00 and so on Relative mode The timer is started when the computation is started The timer is repeated at each interval The timer is suspended while the power is lost Example Interval 00 15 The timer expires every 15 minutes after the computation is started Setting timers Timers are set in the basic setting mode For detail seesection 11 9 Setting the timer No for TLOG computation The number of the timer used by the channel computing the TLOG is selected from 1 2 and 3 in the setting mode For the setting procedure see section 11 8 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog About the Sum Unit of the TLOG SUM In the sum computation TLOG SUM of time series data are summed over the scan interval However for flow values that have units s min or h a simple summation results in the actual value not matching the computed result because the scan interval and the unit of the input values are different In these cases the unit of the data measured over the scan interval is converted to match the unit of the input values and the computation is performed 11 15 11 7 TLOG Computation About Reset For example if the scan interval is 2 s and the input value is 100 m min a simple summation would add 100 every 2 s resulting in 3000 after one minute However if the computing unit is set to min then 2s 60s is mult
211. f the displayed line from three types 1 2 or 3 dots Up to four trip lines can be displayed on a single group Sections 7 7 and 7 13 1 7 SUON OUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 1 3 Display Function Information Description Scale display A scale appropriate for the measured item can be displayed for each channel The number of divisions of the display scale created by the main scale marks can be set to a value in the range 4 to 12 div also applies to the bar graph display Medium and small scale marks are displayed in between the main scale marks You can select whether or not to display the scale for each channel and the display position Section 7 10 Turn ON OFF the numerical The numerical display section can be turned ON or OFF If display section the numerical display section is turned OFF the display shows only the waveform and the scale See section 4 3 Zone display The waveform of each channel is displayed in its display range zone The waveforms are easier to view because they do not overlap See the explanation of the zone display below Section 7 9 Partial expanded display You can expand the important section of the display area See the explanation of the partial expanded display below gt Sections 7 11 and 7 12 Explanation regarding the zone display The display range of the measured computed data is called a zone Zones can be set for each channel The waveforms ca
212. fies the environmental conditions required during transportation from shipment to the start of service and during storage as well as during transportation and storage if this instrument is temporarily taken out of service No malfunction will occur under these conditions with serious damage which is impossible to repair however calibration may be necessary to recover normal operation performance Ambient temperature Humidity Vibration Shock Other Specifications Clock Daylight saving Accuracy of clock Memory backup Key lock function Key login function Insulation resistance 25 C to 60 C 5 to 95 RH No condensation is allowed 10 to 60 Hz 4 9 m s maximum 392 m s maximum while being packed With calendar function year of grace The time can be adjusted by a remote contact with the remote control option Summer and wintertime can be set 100 ppm excluding a delay of 1 second maximum caused each time the power is turned on A built in lithium battery backs up the setup parameters battery life approximately ten years at room temperature ON OFF and password can be set Power on with log out mode and all key operations are not permitted User name User ID and password are required to enter the operation mode Each terminal to ground terminal 20 MQ or greater at 500 VDC 14 16 14 7 General Specifications Dielectric strength Safety and
213. g Message Strings Trend cccccccsescesessesssssessssessessosssasanesaesacensasasaseessauseaesaeranaas 7 4 Setting the Message String Trend ssania 7 7 Soning Group Spanner or Ar r a S AEEA 7 8 Setting the Trip Line TENA jcccscctscisecvescasaver caves csceveevesess coamsvvecstenstacevscsadeasecesen civestendevs 7 10 Setting the Channel Display Colors Trend Bar Graph eecceeeeeeeeeeereeeneeeneeeeeeeee 7 12 Using Zone Displays Trend c c cscccctenceccscctecseersaceesscsncesseaeneseipececnsecdescaasesnecicnaseeesutnaiee 7 13 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend cee cdec esses chvecatestacensadve Sees secnpescchviedsictaalas cchesicaeanieyisrameneds etic Ea OTENE 7 15 Using Partial Expansion Display Trend 0 0 00 cece eee eee ce eee seeeceteeenee sees 7 20 Setting Whether or Not to Use the Partial Expansion Display Basic Setting Mode 7 22 Setting the Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width Grid ANd Scroll Time eee eeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeeeessaeeseneeeaees 7 23 Setting the Brightness of the Screen and the Backlight Saver Function ceeeee 7 25 Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 Data Types to be Acquired and Saved ccc csccssevecasesnesccsivsenssvsereceasedsacsivstessessvaceeetss Function to Acquir
214. g the settings 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key confirms the new settings The parameter boxes return to a white color The cursor moves to the first parameter on the page Returning to the menu screen of the setting mode 1 Press the Menu or ESC key to return to the menu screen of the setting mode Exiting the setting mode 1 Press the MENU or the ESC key to save the settimgs and return to the operation mode Entering Numbers The operation to enter numbers is used such as when setting the date time or the display span of the input range Window for entering numbers AA L 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 Select numbers When the window used to enter the numbers appears enter the value according to the following key operations Left and right arrow keys Selects the input position Up and down arrow keys Enters the number suoneiado uowwog 2poN UNY S 1ed JO SEWeN 7 Procedure 3 21 3 6 Common Key Operations Entering Characters Procedure Used to set tag names set message strings set or enter passwords Window for entering characters Select character Insert overwrite Selected character type When the window used to enter the string appear enter the characters according to the following key operations Left and right arrow keys Selects the input position Up and down arrow key Enters the character A a 1 soft key Select upper case alphabet A lower case alphabet a or num
215. ge format This mode is entered by pressing the FUNC key for three seconds at the setting mode menu This mode cannot be entered while data acquisition or computation is in progress Operations such as measurements alarm detection and data acquisition are stopped Basic settings of the functions Operation related to the file on the external storage medium 3 7 suoneiado uowwog 2poN UNy SHed JO SEWeN 7 3 4 Run Mode Functions and Operations in the Operation Mode Operation screen Displays various operation screens such as trend digital bar graph alarm summary message summary memory summary historical trend and report display option Screens are switched by the arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key See chapter 4 Operations using the FUNC key Pressing the FUNC key displays a menu that is assigned to the soft keys at the bottom of the screen The menu varies depending on the setup information and options Press the Next soft key to display the soft key menu in the next line The function is executed by pressing the soft key Press the FUNC or ESC key to erase the menu without executing the assigned function AlarmACK Message enuen Next 174 sample Keylock Logout Trigger atk Hath Snap z Save Save FUNC key menu Menu Ref Section Description Alarm ACK 6 1 6 4 Release alarm indication and relay output when alarm display and alarm output relay action is set to hold Message 7 4 Disp
216. ge is 200 0 to 900 0 C The allowed range of display span 1100 0 to 1100 0 C For DC voltage input the display span cannot exceed the input range The upper limit and the lower limit cannot be set to the same value 5 7 sBuijes jauueyo jueweinseayy fa 5 4 Difference Computation Delta Setting Explanation 6 Ref CH Set the reference channel See the explanation Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key The following table shows the mode type range and measurable range Mode Type Range Measurable Range Delta Volt 20 mV 20 00 to 20 00 mV 60 mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200 mV 200 0 to 200 0 mV 2V 2 000 to 2 000 V 6V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20 V 20 00 to 20 00 V Delta TC R 1760 0 to 1760 0 C S 1760 0 to 1760 0 C B 1820 0 to 1820 0 C K 1570 0 to 1570 0 C E 1000 0 to 1000 0 C J 1300 0 to 1300 0 C T 600 0 to 600 0 C N 1300 0 to 1300 0 C Ww 2315 0 to 2315 0 C L 1100 0 to 1100 0 C U 600 0 to 600 0 C Delta RTD Pt100 800 0 to 800 0 C JPt100 750 0 to 750 0 C CU1 to 6 CU10 500 0 to 500 0 C option CU25 500 0 to 500 0 C option Delta DI Level 1to1 Contact 1to1 The relationship with the reference channel Even if the input type or the meas
217. gs designed for 4 mm screws with insulation sleeves be used on the lead wire ends for the optional screw terminals suffix code H3 a a Crimp on lug Take measures to prevent noise from entering the measurement circuit Move the measurement circuit away from the power cable power circuit and ground cable e Itis desirable that the item being measured does not generate noise However if this is unavoidable isolate the measurement circuit from the item Also ground the item being measured e Shielded wires should be used to minimize noise caused by electrostatic induction Connect the shield to the earth ground terminal of the recorder as necessary make sure you are not grounding at two points To minimize noise caused by electromagnetic induction twist the measurement circuit wires at short equal intervals Make sure to earth ground the earth ground terminal through minimum resistance 100 9 When using internal reference junction compensation on the thermocouple input take measures to stabilize the temperature at the input terminal Always use the input terminal cover Do not use thick wires which may cause large heat dissipation cross sectional area 0 5 mm or less recommended e Make sure that the air temperature remains reasonably stable Large temperature fluctuations can occur if a nearby fan turns ON or OFF Connecting the input wires in parallel with other devices can cause signal degradation
218. hannel can be specified on the trend display These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press the softkey Next 1 3 Press the soft key O l Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key BE Setting on a computation channel option To display the setting screen press the soft key 6 1 m First CH fal Last cH far Zone Partial off Lower os Upper 100 Graph Division Ea 2 Bar graph Normal 3 Scale position 1 4 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here Zone and Partial are also simultaneously set 7 15 Aejdsig y Buneiado pue Huas 7 10 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend Setting the number of divisions for the scale 2 Division This is the number of scale divisions The scale is equally divided and scale marks are displayed at the divided position Select the number of
219. he alarm occurs By selecting de energize the alarm output relay will operate in the same manner as when the alarm occurs when the power supply is disrupted Energize or de energize applies to all alarm output relays The initial setting is set to energize lo 0 Ay O Energized NO c NC NO c NC NO c NC De energized NO c NC NO c NC NO c NC Power failure Alarm off Alarm on NO Normally opened C common and NC normally closed 6 12 6 4 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function Basic Setting Mode Hold non hold operation of the alarm output relay When the alarm changes from an ON state to the OFF state you can select to Turn OFF the output relay in sync with the alarm release non hold Turn OFF the output relay with an alarm acknowledge operation hold This applies to all alarm output relays The initial setting is set to Nonhold When set to non hold Alarm on Alarm off Shows the status of the normally opened 7 NO contact of the relay The status is the Relay output on reverse for the normally closed contact Relay output off When set to hold Alarm on Alarm off Press Alarm ACK key Relay output on suuely Pumas pue Huibpea mouyoy Relay output off Note ___ If the reflash alarm is turned ON 101 to 103 are set to non hold Specifying hold produces no effect Hold non hold of the alarm indicator When the alarm changes from the activated state to the rele
220. he DISP ENTER key The number of significant digits is 5 excluding the decimal When using exponents to set values use 5 or less digits for the mantissa and two digits for the exponent The allowed range is as follows 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 11 14 11 7 TLOG Computation Determines the sum maximum minimum average and maximum minimum P P values of the specified channel at specified time intervals The interval is set by timers The example shown in the following figure indicates the case in which the average value of channel 1 over each interval TLOG AVE 01 is determined Equation TLOG AVG 01 Average value Average value Scan interval Interval set by a timer ie J l HAHHA HHH HHHH HHH HHHH HHHH HHHH 11 gt Time Sampling TLOG computation cannot be performed when the corresponding measurement channel is set to Skip or the corresponding computation channel is turned Off Timer Mode and Action Timer mode There are two timer modes absolute mode and relative mode Absolute mode Timer expires at times determined from the reference time and the interval The reference time is specified by the hour 00 to 23 Example 1 Reference time 14 00 Interval 12h The expiration time is set to 2 00 2 00 AM and 14 00 2 00 PM Example 2 Reference time 00 00 Interval 10 min The expiration time is set to 0 00 0 10 0 20 23 40 and 23 50 For
221. he power resumes data are written to a new file Data acquisition can also be started or stopped via remote control or communication commands The START STOP operation also starts stops the report function When the computation is stopped it is started with the START key 8 13 wnp n abe10 sg jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eead e 8 6 Acquiring Event Data During Trigger Mode or Rotate Mode Start data acquisition 1 Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state The icon in the status display section will change accordingly A bar indicating the pre trigger data in the status display section is displayed in orange 2 When the trigger occurs data acquisition starts Providing the key trigger that starts the data acquisition to the internal memory This operation is carried out in the trigger wait state For all other cases this operation produces no effect For details related to triggers other than the key trigger see section sections 8 2 or 8 11 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Trigger soft key to start the data acquisition of the event data to the internal memory Stop data acquisition Writing stops upon reaching the specified time data length In the status display section the block to which data were stored turns green See section 4 2 Note During the Trigger mode Full is displayed when data acquisition to all blocks is complete When Full is displayed
222. he procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Character on page 3 22 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 7 7 Aejdsig y Buneiado pue Huas 7 6 Setting Groups Procedure Trend digital and bar graph displays are displayed in groups Channels can be assigned to each group and the group name can be registered e Number of groups 4 e Number of channels Up to 6 channels group As for setting the channels to display the trend see section 8 10 These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w Press the softkey Next 1 3 Press the soft key O To display the setting screen press the soft key Ooa l Group number 1 Group set Group name GROUP 1 ee 2 CH set a1 82 03 04 gt 3 Trip line 1 ort F 3 Off 4 Off The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in
223. he setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press ew To display the setting screen press the soft key Ooa l 1 mA First CH fal Last cH far Range Hode Range Span L Span U R 6 6 1768 8 2 3 First CH fal Last cH far Range Hode Range Span L Span_U PT 200 0 668 8 2 3 4 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 2 Mode Set the mode to TC thermocouple or RTD resistance temperature detector 3 Range Set the type of thermocouple or RTD 4 Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Note Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value 5 3 sBuijes jauueyo jueweinseay 7 5 2 Thermocouple TC Resistance Temperature Detector RTD Setting
224. he square root is displayed as the measured value of that channel The computed result can be scaled to a value in the appropriate unit and displayed When the input type is set to DC voltage thermocouple RTD or ON OFF input the input signal can be converted to a value in the appropriate unit desired and displayed Channels that are not measured They are not displayed n e n e 1 Notation used by the RD MV100 to represent the input modes Itis used when setting the measurement channels 2 This is optional 3 This item defines the type of signals that can be connected to the input terminal when the input mode is set to Difference 3 Square root or Scaling The description of the input types DC voltage Thermocouple Resistive temperature detector and ON OFF input are the same as the descriptions given for the input modes DC voltage Thermocouple Resistive temperature detector and ON OFF input respectively 1 2 1 2 Functions of the Input Section Input Range and Measurable Range Burnout If the signal to be measured is a DC current a shunt resistance is attached to the input terminal to convert the current signal to a voltage signal The input mode is set to DC voltage in this case For the various types of shunt resistors and the procedure related to setting the current input see section 5 1 You can se
225. his may damage the recorder Do not apply shock to the recorder When not in use make sure to turn OFF the power switch If there are any symptoms of trouble such as strange odors or smoke coming from the recorder immediately turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord Then contact your nearest Omega CAUTION Don t put any weight on the recorder while it is in reclined position with its front feet up as it may damage the feet Handling Precautions of External Storage Media Take special care in handling external storage media as they are delicate products For general precautions see the instruction manual that came with the external storage medium Floppy disks and Zip disks may not operate properly under high or low temperature environment If you are using the recorder in a low temperature environment less than 10 C let the recorder warm up for at least 30 minutes beforehand If you are using them in a high temperature environment greater than 40 C we recommend the external storage medium be inserted into the drive when saving the data and be removed after the data have been saved manual save see section 8 4 Remove the external storage medium from the drive when turning ON OFF the recorder Do not remove the external storage medium while the access lamp is lit Doing so can destroy the data on the medium CAUTION Don t expose the floppy disk drive or zip drive to vibration or shocks as it may
226. his function activates the relay output when the CPU fails The relay is de energized on CPU failure The relay is de energized if the CPU fails This relay action cannot be reversed to energized on failure and thus this relay is de energized also upon power off including a power failure e Relay behavior de energized on failure NL LA LIZ NO c NC NO c NC NO c NC Normal Failure Power off NO C and NC denote normally opened common and normally closed respectively Operation at memory end This function activates the relay output when the remaining space time in the internal memory or the external storage medium becomes small The relay is energized if the memory end is detected The relay action cannot be reversed to de energized on memory end When the relay is energized save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium during manual save or use another external storage medium during auto save The memory end detection operates as follows e When using auto save When using auto save and the storage medium is inserted the relay is energized when the remaining space on the storage medium falls to 10 At this point the icon of the external storage medium on the status display section on the screen turns to red from green See section 4 2 e When using manual save e When the type of data to be acquired is display data only or display data and event data When the remaining time for storing the display
227. iho cursor position Action Energize bule Behavior Nonhold Indicator Nonhold Rate of change Increase 1 Decrease 1 Hysteresis On None 181 161 162 101 183 Next 1 2 L J T Setting selections selected using the soft keys suoneiado uowwog 2poN UNy SHed JO SEWeN 7 3 6 Common Key Operations Selecting the parameter 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The available selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen above the soft keys 2 Select the parameter with the soft key The box containing the parameter that was changed turns yellow The cursor moves the next parameter To cancel the settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key Confirming the settings 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key confirms the new settings The parameter boxes return to a white color The cursor moves to the first parameter on the page Returning to the menu screen of the basic setting mode 1 Press the ESC key to return to the menu screen of the basic setting mode Exiting the basic setting mode Carry out the following steps when the basic setting menu is displayed 1 Press the END soft key A confirmation window with a message Do you want to store and make the new settings take effect appears 2 Selecting Yes with the arrow key and pressing the DISP ENTER key saves the new settings and returns to the operatio
228. ile the number of samples acquired is less than the specified number of samples the avarage of acquired data is computed The computation error data are not included in the rolling average computation When the measured data exceed the upper and lower limits indicated below the value is clipped at the upper or lower limit and the moving average is calculated The upper and lower limits vary depending on the decimal position of the span upper and lower limits of the computation channel Decimal Position of the Span Upper Lower Limit of the Upper Lower Limit Computation Channel 100000000 audud 10000000 NOOO 1000000 OOO OOO 100000 DO 10000 O OOOOO 1000 11 21 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog 11 11 Overview of the Report Function This function is used to create hourly daily weekly and monthly reports The report data can be displayed on the screen The report data are saved to the external storage medium in ASCII format For data formats see appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Types of Reports and Specifications Types of reports Hourly report On every hour on the hour the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from an hour of data up to the current hour and written to the internal memory e Daily report At the specified time everyday the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are dete
229. imum value is below 9999999 99999999 The decimal position that was specified when the span for the equation was specified is reflected in the maximum and minimum values For example if the span setting of the equation is 200 0 then 99999999 is output when the value exceeds 99999999 9 and 99999999 is output when the value is below 999999 9 SUM When all data are computation errors or Blank Sum value computation overflow e When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 xipueddy z App 11 Index A absolute val rsisi ia aaia aAa 11 4 ACCESS AMP a E A E E AE 3 2 ACCOSSONES is eieaa e E REAA AER v alarm NYS ETESIS saisin raaa Naaa ERE AE E EA EER EEr 6 11 indication hold non old sss sisisassusssisasriresrrrnversisareeseina 6 10 EEE E E E E E E A E 6 1 SEMO scac cece nencde saeteces sairaana sanasi anana a e sa EEK E ARTER aT 6 5 WIND iosian trny aired a e e 2 7 Alarm ACK arroen oa E OTER 6 1 alarmi TUNCHON ccssvencccnensecasesaaseescetaspentaeransenacisasteencamanencenens 1 17 alarm MYSt PeSIS minnanna aia e aiaa 1 19 alarm output relay IAND OR i snini ranri 6 10 energized de energized sciac cisicecedeecsvacesescavewtevasveneaves 6 10 NOID NONM MOING resser a 6 10 reflash 6 10 alarmi SUIMUIMMANY ssrin sesane neiaa EAEE 1 10 4 13 AND OR MEE E A E A E T arithmetical computations aT AS
230. ing Note Scale lower limit and scale upper limit cannot be set to the same value The recorder converts the measured data within a value span derived by removing the decimal from the scaling upper and lower limits In other words conversion is performed by using a span of 10 if the scale setting is 5 to 5 and 100 if the scale setting is 5 0 to 5 0 The resolution of the value derived by using a span of 10 is coarser than the value derived using a span of 100 Because the display becomes rough set this value so that it is greater than 100 6 Unit Set the unit Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a character string Enter the unit up to 6 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select YES using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key For the range and measurable range see section 5 1 Voltage Input Setting Computing equation The RD MV100 uses the following square root computation Using the following definitions Vmin Lower limit of span Vmax Upper limit of span Fmin Lower limit of scale Fmax Upper limit of scale e Vx Input voltage Fx Scaling value Fx Fma
231. ing Range 20 00 to 20 00 mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200 0 to 200 0 mV 2 000 to 2 000 V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20 00 to 20 00 V 0 0 to 1760 C 32 to 3200 F 0 0 to 1760 C 32 to 3200 F 0 0 to 1820 C 32 to 3200 F 200 0 to 1370 C 328 to 2498 F 200 0 to 800 C _ 328 0 to 1472 0 F 200 0 to 1100 C 328 0 to 2012 0 F 200 0 to 400 C _ 328 0 to 752 0 F 0 0 to 1300 C 32 to 2372 F 0 0 to 2315 C 328 0 to 4199 F 200 0 to 900 C _ 328 0 to 1652 0 F Pt1004 200 0 to 400 C 328 0 to 752 0 F o 600 C _ 328 0 to 1112 0 F JPt100 4 DCV input TTL o 550 C 328 0 to 1022 0 F OFF less than 2 4 V ON more than 2 4 V Contact input Contact ON OFF 1_R S B K E J T N IEC584 1 1995 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 2 W W 5 Rd W 26 Rd Hoskins Mfg Co ASTM E988 3 L Fe CuNi DIN43710 U 4 Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 IE JPt100 JIS C1604 1989 J Cu CuNi DIN43710 C751 1995 DIN IEC751 1996 IS C1606 1989 5 Measuring current i 1 mA A D Integration Time Thermocouple Burnout Filter Selectable from 20 ms 50 Hz 16 7 ms 60 Hz 100 ms 50 60 Hz for RD MV106 112 or AUTO automatic selection from 20 ms and 16 7 ms by detection of power supply frequency Burnout upscale downscale function can be switched ON OFF for each channel Burnout upscale downscale selectabl
232. ing cases When the number of display data files exceeds 16 A file is created for each auto save interval see section 8 8 When the event data are acquired to the internal memory in the free run mode and the number of files exceeds 16 A file is created at specified acquisition periods data length see section 8 11 8 7 Saving the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium Explanation Saving the data to the external storage medium using key operation during auto save mode This operation applies when the data acquisition of the display data or the data acquisition of event data in the free mode is in progress and the data storage to the storage medium is set to auto save The display data or event data can be saved to the external storage medium at arbitrary times The data acquisition to the internal memory continues even if this operation is carried out 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu shown below Save Display When the type of data acquired to the internal memory is display data or display data and event data Save Event When the type of data acquired to the internal memory is event data and the trigger is set to free mode 4 For the setting procedure see section 8 11 2 The soft key is not displayed in the trigger or rotate mode 2 Press the soft key to save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium Disles C Save Display The displ
233. ing event data only If we assume that the number of measuring channels is 20 the number of computing channels is 10 and the sampling interval is 1 sec then Number of data per channel 1 200 000 bytes 20 x 2 bytes 10 x 4 bytes 15 000 data Maximum number of data points is 120 000 Sampling length 15 000 x 1 sec 15 000 sec approx 4 hours 3 When acquiring both display data and event data The sampling length is calculated by defining the capacity for display data as 900 000 bytes and the capacity for event data as 300 000 bytes The method of calculation is the same as shown above Except the maximum number of data points is 75 000 for display data and 30 000 for event data 14 6 14 3 Data Storage Specifications Example of sampling length In case measurement ch 4 ch mathematical ch 0 ch Display data file only approx Display Rate lt 30 min 240 min min div Sampling Interval sal 60s 480 s s Sampling Length 41h 34 days 52 days 104 days 416 days Event data file only approx Sampling Interval 125 ms 500 ms 1s 5s 30s 120s Sampling Length 42h 16h 33h 6 days 41 days 166 days Display data file Event data file Display data file approx Display Rate min div eae min Sampling Interval eds s Sampling Length 312 days Event data file approx Sampling Interval 125 ms 500 ms 1s 5s 30s 120s Sampling Length th 42h
234. ing interval sample rate in item 3 number of blocks and the number of measurement and computation channels that are acquired 7 Event Pre Trigger This is the range of data to be acquired before the trigger point It is specified as a percentage of the data length 0 5 25 50 75 95 and 100 If 0 is selected all data after the trigger point are acquired The initial setting is 0 8 Event Trigger Key When using key operation to activate the trigger turn this parameter On External When using remote control function option to activate the trigger turn this parameter On Alarm When using alarms as triggers turn this parameter On Note e Ifthe Alarm parameter is turned On trigger is activated if any one of the alarms occurs If Alarm parameter is turned On and the alarm was already activated when the START key is pressed trigger is also activated OR logic applies to the Key External and Alarm parameters If any one of the conditions that are turned On is met the trigger is activated Acquiring display data and event data 2 Data type Select E D Note If Auto auto save is selected in step 1 and E D is selected in step 2 set the auto save interval for the display data See section 8 8 8 24 8 11 Setting the Method of the Display Event Data Acquisition Basic Setting Mode Explanation Boxes used to set the method for event data acquisition are displayed The procedures used t
235. ing the display data to be loaded A list of files in the selected directory is displayed in the right column Root directory is denoted by 2 Press the right arrow key to move the cursor on to the file list Press the up or arrow key to select the display data file to be loaded To move back to the Directory name column press the left arrow key 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the waveform on the historical trend screen To return to the Save Load Clear data menu screen without displaying the historical trend press the ESC key Note Files saved in the internal memory as Event Data File Only can t be loaded 9 4 Viewing Event Data in the External Storage Medium Procedure Loads the event data saved in the external storage medium and displays the waveform on the historical trend screen This operation can be carried out when the acquisition of event data is set Event or E D in section 8 11 See section 4 6 for the use of the historical trend e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press the soft key Next 1 3 Press 7 soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press the soft key Next 1 3 Press soft key to display the Load event data screen Load event data Directory File name Time 16367216 DEV 2000 01 03 67 21 10307220 DEV 2000 01 03 07 22 10307221 DEV 2000 01 03 07 2
236. interval Mode Free Trigger Rotate Number of blocks number of memory divisions Data length file size Pre trigger position Type of trigger to use 4 Memory amp trend 8 10 Measurement channels to acquire data display the trend Computation channels to acquire data display the trend 5 Aux Switch between tag display and channel display 7 2 Minimum remaining amount of internal memory at which to generate the alarm 10 6 Set the displayed language 10 8 Use Not use partial expansion display 7 12 Use Not use batch function for models with BT1 10 11 6 Key lock 10 2 Use Not use key lock Password Keys to lock enable disable the key lock 7 Key login 10 4 Use Not use key login Auto logout On Off Use Not use user ID User name User ID Password Allow Prohibit basic setting mode 8 Save Load Initialize 8 1 Save settings Save setup data to the external storage medium 9 1 8 2 Load settings Load setup data from the external storage medium 9 1 8 3 Delete Delete files on the external storage medium 9 5 8 4 Format Format the external storage medium 9 5 8 5 Initialize Initialize the setup data in the internal memory and clear measured computed data 9 8 9 Option 9 1 Remote 10 7 Action assignment on remote terminals 9 2 Report 11 13 Report types Date Time of creation Report channel assignments Sum unit 9 3 Timer TLOG 11 9 Timer mode absolute time relative time Interval
237. interval However for flow values that have units s min h or day a simple summation results in the actual value not matching the computed result because the scan interval and the unit of the input values are different In these cases the unit of the data measured over the scan interval is converted to match the unit of the input values and the computation is performed 11 22 11 11 Overview of the Report Function For example if the scan interval is 2 s and the input value is 100 m min a simple summation would add 100 every 2 s resulting in 3000 after one minute However if the sum unit is set to min then 2s 60s is multiplied every scan interval before the value is added giving a result that is close to the actual input value The scan interval unit is in seconds OFF measured value S measured value x scan interval MIN measured value x scan interval 60 HOUR measured value x scan interval 3600 DAY measured value x scan interval 86400 For the setting procedure see section 11 13 If power is lost while the report function is in progress If a power disruption occurred while the report function was in progress the report function will resume after the power is restored The exact operation will vary depending on whether the power is restored before or after the scheduled time to create a report Time of Recovery Report Operation After the time to create the Report data are created immediately aft
238. ion Bar graph Select horizontal or vertical 7 23 Aejdsig y Buneiado pue Huas 7 13 Setting the Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width Grid and Scroll Time Explanation Set the background color 3 Background Select white or black Note The background color of the historical trend is opposite that of the trend display Setting the trend line width 4 Trend line Select the width of the trend line as 1 2 or 3 dots Setting the width of the trip line 5 Trip line Select the width of the trip line as 1 2 or 3 dots Setting the number of grids on the waveform display area 6 Grid Select the number of grids from 4 to 12 Setting the interval at which the displayed group is automatically switched 6 Scroll time Select the interval from 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s and 1 min Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Grid on the waveform display area Grid The number of grid is 10 7 24 7 14 Setting the Brightness of the Screen and the Backlight Saver Function Procedure There are eight screen brightness settings which can be selected 1 to 8 The lifetime of the LCD backlight can be extended by automatically dimming the light when ther
239. ion De 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Off Partial On Off On Expand 1t0 99 Numerical value Boundary View Direction Trend Horizontal Bar graph Horizontal Background Trend line 1 3 Trip line 1 3 Grid 4 5 6 7 8 9 ot Scroll Es 10s 20s 30s 1 min LCD Brightness 1 2 3 a 5 6 7 8 Backlight saver On Off On Saver time 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min omn th _ i Restore Key Math color CH31 to CH60 Red Green Blue B violet See section 14 2 for initial settings Brown Orange Y green Lightblue Violet Gray Lime Cyan Darkblue Yellow Lightgray Purple Math Zone Lower to 95 Numerical value Upper 5 to 1100 Math partial On Off On Expand 1 to 99 Numerical value Boundary App 2 Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Math Graph Division 4 5 6 7 8 9 io 12 Bar graph Normal f Center Scale position 1 2 j2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Off Save Load Save settings Clear data 1 Gad settings Save data Load display data Load event data File list Delete Format Clear data Time set Numerical value Math set Math range On Off On an Equation for computation Span Lower Numerical value Span Upper Unit Character string Math alarm On Off On Type H L T t Value Numerical value Relay On Off On Off Number 101 to 106 Up t
240. ion overflow occures when the value falls below 3 4E 38 Output value when detected errorous data measurement over range data or computation overflow data Channels Data Output Value Measurement channels measurement error Blank plus over range 99999 minus over range 99999 Computation channels computation error 999999999 plus computation overflow 999999999 minus computation overflow 99999999 CH TAG and UNIT lines In the following cases both the CH TAG line and the UNIT line are rewritten after a carriage return line feed and followed by manual sampled data e When the measurement channel is switched from some setting other than Skip to Skip e When the measurement channel is switched from Skip to some other setting e When the computation channels are turned On or turned Off e When the unit is changed Four lines from the bottom of the file example shows the output when the unit for channel 31 is changed from mV to V App 8 Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Data Format of the Report File The hourly daily weekly and monthly reports are output in ASCII format using values and strings that are separated by commas The channel tag unit average value maximum value minimum value and sum value are not output for channels in which the input range is set to Skip or for which the computation is turned OFF Example The following example is the daily repor
241. iplied every scan interval before the value is added giving a result that is close to the actual input value The scan interval unit is in seconds OFF gt measured value S measured value x scan interval MIN measured value x scan interval 60 HOUR measured value x scan interval 3600 For the setting procedure see section 11 8 Whether or not to reset the computed result at every timeout is selectable The figure below shows the action of TLOG SUM computation Example Result of the TLOG SUM computation Interval 1 2 3 Reset Reset Reset iad a 1 Reset Off In case of TLOG MAX computation for example the maximum value is derived for every interval when Reset is On and the maximum value from the start of computation is derived when Reset is Off If Power is Lost while the TLOG Computation was in Progress The TLOG computation is resumed when the power is restored The operation varies depending on whether power is restored before or after the scheduled time to create the TLOG data Time of Recovery TLOG Computation Operation After the time to create TLOG data are created immediately when power is the TLOG data restored The measured computed data up to the time of the power disruption are used At the next scheduled TLOG computation time data will be used from the point in time after the power was restored Before the time to create After power is restored TLOG data are create
242. ired and the sampling length Use the information when determining the amount of time it takes for the internal memory to become full or when deciding the channels to be acquired or the sampling interval The possible range of menus of the auto save interval of display data and the data length of event data is displayed in the soft keys based on the information described here Data format The display data have minimum and maximum values for each sampling interval Event data consists of instantaneous values The number of data bytes per channel is shown in the following table Data Type Measurement Channel Computation Channel Display data 4 bytes channel 8 bytes channel Event data 2 bytes channel 4 bytes channel Example Data format when the data of measurement channels 1 to 4 and a computation channel 31 are acquired Display data 1st scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH31 CH31 min imax min max min max min max min max 2nd scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH31 CH31 min imax min max min i max min i max min max to nth scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH31 CH31 min imax min max min i max min i max min max KWH 2 bytes binary data Event data 1st scan CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH31 2nd scan CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH31 to nth scan CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH31 WH 2 bytes binary data Internal memory capacity The capacity of
243. j YES Contact Omega 12 8 12 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart The reading error is large The digital indication or trend trace waveform is unstable The trend trace waveform stays at 0 or 100 Does the input meet the specifications signal source resistance etc NO YES Are the span and NO range settings correct YES Is the input free of noise NO YES Is the environmental temperature kept constant for temperature measurement NO YES Is the input wiring correct NO YES Is the input wiring parallel YES with other equipment NO Is the RJC setting correct NO for TC input YES Contact Omega Change the input to meet the specifications See section 14 1 Adjust the span and range See sections 5 1 to 5 7 Separate the input wiring from the noise source Ground the recorder properly Ground the measuring object properly Insulate the TC from the measured object Use shielded cable for input Correct the A D integration frequency See section 5 9 Use the input filter See section 5 8 Use the cover for the input terminal Protect the input terminal from wind or fans Keep the room temperature constant around the input terminal Wire correctly See section 2 3 Fix the terminal block properly Fasten the terminal screws Insulate the RTD from ground If
244. l memory capacity Data Type Capacity of Internal Memory Display data only 1 2 MB Display data and event data Display data 0 9 MB Event data 0 3 MB Event data only 1 2 MB Maximum number of data points per channel that can be stored Data Type Maximum Number of Data Points Per Channel Display data only 1 200 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 4 number of computation channels x 8 Except the maximum number of data points is 100 000 Display data and event data Display data 900 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 4 number of computation channels x 8 Except the maximum number of data points is 75 000 Event data 300 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 Except the maximum number of data points is 30 000 Event data only 1 200 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 Except the maximum number of data points is 120 000 This logic is explained in more detail below 1 When acquiring display data only If we assume that the number of measuring channels is 20 the number of computing channels is 10 and the display rate is 30 min div 60 sec sampling interval then Number of data per channel 1 200 000 bytes 20 x 4 bytes 10 x 8 bytes 7 500 data Maximum number of data points is 100 000 Sampling length per file 7 500 x 60 sec 450 000 sec approx 5 days 2 When acquir
245. laying Free Space on the External Storage Medium Saving the Screen Image riiin pnia te ado e n aiei Clearing Data from the Internal Memory Initializing Setup Data eee eee eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeecaeeseaeeseeeeaeeseeeeeeeeneeenaees Chapter 10 Other Functions 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 12 10 13 Using Key MOCK issenensis edanari naaa aid EN Raa 10 1 Setting the Key Lock Function Basic Setting Mode eeessesseeseesreersrirsreernerrrernsrnses 10 2 Using the Key Login Logout FUMGCHION s s ccsccccccccscceessiecesecsccssessanssscaeecscienssasssanessaccssatenes 10 4 Setting the Key Login Logout Functions Basic Setting Mode cceeeereeeteeeeeees 10 6 Displaying the Log Screen System Screen sraide ianiai 10 8 Setting the Memory End Relay Output Time Option F1 Basic Setting Mode 10 10 Setting the Remote Control Functions Option R1 Basic Setting Mode 10 11 Setting the Displayed Language Basic Setting Mode eeeeseeeeeeeereeereeeneeeneees 10 14 Using the Daylight Savings Time Adjustment Function ceceeeceeeseeeeeeeeereeeneeeneees 10 20 Setting the Temperature Unit Basic Setting Mode ecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneerneees 10 22 Chapter 11 Computation Report Function Option 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 TF 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 Overview of the Computation FUNCTION eeceeecessseces
246. lays messages and stores them to the internal memory Manual sample 8 12 Stores instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory Key lock 10 1 Enables or disables key lock when key kock is in use Logout 10 3 Logout when being logged in while key login is in use Trigger 8 6 8 11 Starts acquiring event data when Key Trigger is set as a trigger to start acquiring event data Math START STOP 11 3 Starts stops computation when the computation function M1 is equipped Math reset 11 3 Clears computed results when the computation function M1 is equipped and the computation is suspended Math ACK 11 3 Clears the computation dropout display when the computation function M1 is equipped and the computation dropout occures Snapshot 9 6 Saves the screen image data to the external medium Log 10 5 Displays log screens or the system information screen FTP test Execute FTP test Save Display Save Event 8 7 Stores the display data or event data to the external storage medium only when the display data or event data free mode are being acquired to the internal memory See RD MV100 Communication Interface User s Manual 3 4 Run Mode Other key operations START STOP Start stop acquiring measured computed data For the operating procedure see sections 8 5 and 8 6 The waveform on the trend display also starts stops When the computation function M1 is equiped computation and the report fun
247. lect the Input range that is appropriate for the input signal for DC voltage Thermocouple RTD and ON OFF input For example R S B K E J T N W L and U are available input ranges for Thermocouple For each Input range a measurable range is defined for example the measurable range for R of Thermocouple is 0 0 C to 1760 C For details see section 14 1 suonoun4 JO MAIAJOAO 7 When measuring temperature using a thermocouple and the thermocouple burns out you can specify the measurement result to be set to positive over range or negative over range Burnout can be set on each measurement channel The initial setting is set so that burnout is not indicated For the setting procedure see section 5 9 1 Positive over range is a condition in which the input signal is over the upper limit of the measurable range The measured value is indicated as xxxxx 2 Negative over range is a condition in which the input signal is below the lower limit of the measurable range The measured value is indicated as xxxxx Reference Junction Compensation RJC When measuring the temperature using a thermocouple the reference junction compensation can be used You can select whether to use the reference junction compensation provided by the recorder or external reference junction compensation If you are using external reference junction compensation you will also set the refe
248. led the display data existing before the execution of this operation are displayed as a historical trend 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen menu 2 Select TREND HISTORY using the up and down arrow keys 3 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Note Even if the display data are not configured to be acquired to the internal memory see section 8 11 the display data existing before the execution of this operation are displayed as a historical trend Showing the all channel display returning to the group display On the group display the channels that are assigned to the group are displayed see section 7 6 On the all channel display the waveform of all channels that are set to display the trend see section 8 10 are displayed over the current group display See the explanation in section 4 3 This operation is carried out on the Historical Trend screen 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen menu TREND HISTORY is selected 4 18 4 6 Using the Historical Trend 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select ALL CHANNEL or GROUP CHANNEL using the up and down arrow keys J 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without swtiching the screen press the ESC key Changing the group on the display screen If
249. ls amp Assemblies 4 Wire Thermocouple RTD amp Thermistor A Calibrators amp Ice Point References 4 Recorders Controllers amp Process Monitors WY Infrared Pyrometers PRESSURE STRAIN AND FORCE 4 Transducers amp Strain Gages 4 Load Cells amp Pressure Gages 4 Displacement Transducers 4 Instrumentation amp Accessories FLOW LEVEL 4 Rotameters Gas Mass Flowmeters amp Flow Computers WY Air Velocity Indicators 4 Turbine Paddlewheel Systems A Totalizers amp Batch Controllers pH CONDUCTIVITY uF pH Electrodes Testers amp Accessories 4 Benchtop Laboratory Meters 4 Controllers Calibrators Simulators amp Pumps WY Industrial pH amp Conductivity Equipment DATA ACQUISITION A Data Acquisition amp Engineering Software 4 Communications Based Acquisition Systems 4 Plug in Cards for Apple IBM amp Compatibles 4 Datalogging Systems A Recorders Printers amp Plotters HEATERS 4 Heating Cable A Cartridge amp Strip Heaters 4 Immersion amp Band Heaters 4 Flexible Heaters 4 Laboratory Heaters ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND CONTROL 4 Metering amp Control Instrumentation 4 Refractometers 4 Pumps amp Tubing A Air Soil amp Water Monitors 4 Industrial Water amp Wastewater Treatment lA pH Conductivity amp Dissolved Oxygen Instruments M3641 1200
250. m The screen will return to the original brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 7 25 Aejdsig y Buneiado pue Huas Chapter 8 Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium 8 1 Data Types to be Acquired and Saved Data Types and File Names Data type The types and the contents of the data that are acquired are as follows Beside those data listed below the setup data see section 9 1 and the screen image data see section 9 6 can be saved to the external storage medium Type Content Display data Waveform data that are used to display trends on the LCD screen The maximum and minimum values from measured computed data within the sampling intervals are held A header string can be written into the display data file a character string that is common to all data files Alarm and message information is held Data format Binary format Event data G The instantaneous values of the measured computed data are acquired at the specified sampling interval There is a mode in which the data acquisition is started when a trigger occurs or another mode in which the data acquisition is started when the START key is pressed The header string can be
251. m Setting Explanation Note If you select delay alarm T or t for the alarm type you must set the alarm delay period See section 6 3 4 Value Enter the value at which the alarm is activated Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 5 Relay On Off Set whether or not to activate the output relay On Off When turned ON the output relay number box appears 6 Number Set the output relay number For the correspondence between the output relay number and the output relay position see section 2 4 Alarm Output Wiring Option When the alarm output relay option is not installed these settings are void Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Alarm type The following eight types of alarm type are available Name Symbol Description Upper limit alarm H An alarm occurs when the measured value becomes greater than or equal to the alarm value Lower limit alarm L An alarm occurs when the measured value becomes smaller than or equal to below the alarm value Difference upper limit alarm
252. m icons in the status display section and on the trend digital bar graph and overview displays The detailed information about the alarms is displayed in the alarm summary Alarms are displayed when the alarm conditions are met You can select to clear the alarm when the conditions are no longer met non hold alarm or hold the alarm until it is cleared hold alarm Alarm indication example overview display and alarm summary display Channel Tag SUOIJOUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 Cursor _ The area corresponding to a channel on which an alarm is occurring is displayed in red The area corresponding to a channel on which an alarm is not occurring is displayed in green Alarm type Unit Measured computed value Number of the alarm information displayed at the last line of the screen Number of the alarm information in the internal memory Tag Channel Alarm No Type Date amp Time when the alarm occurred _ 06 806 Charmel Tyee Alam IN Time Alarm QUT Time Date amp Time rsor le 213 Y aS curso met A fares BUSS Jonge iss when the alarm released es 1H Jan 9 01 11 07 Jan 3 01 11 09 es 1H Jan 9 01 10 58 Jan 9 01 11 05 1 Jan 9 01 10 54 Jan 9 01 11 24 1 Jan 9 01 10 03 Jan 9 01 10 18 I Mark See section 6 1 Number of alarms You can set up to four alarms for each channel Alarm conditions The following eight conditions are available Upper limit alarm An ala
253. m the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 10 10 10 7 Setting the Remote Control Functions Option R1 Basic Setting Mode Procedure Explanation Various actions can be assigned to the eight remote control terminals The assigned action can then be executed by applying a remote input signal to the corresponding terminal These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press mw Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Twice press the softkey Next 1 3 Press the soft key Oo To display the setting screen press the soft key pa Remote No Action a 1 None None None None None None None OaAnMNNM BONS The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure suonouny 19410 2 1 Action Assign actions to Remote numbers 1 to 8 For the functions that can be assigned see the explanation Confirming operation To confirm the new settings pre
254. manual save When using manual save you can select whether to save all the data residing in the internal memory or only the data that have not previously been saved to the storage medium e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Press the softkey Next 1 3 To display the setting screen press the soft key Ox l Directory name Save data won The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Header Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a string Enter the header up to 32 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 2 Directory name Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a string Enter the directory up to 8 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 8 20 8 9 Setting the File Header Directory Name and the Saved Da
255. mber is exceeded data are overwritten from the oldest data For hourly only this constitutes 40 minutes of report data For daily monthly this constitutes 39 daily reports and one monthly report or 38 daily reports and two monthly reports Note The number of report data sets in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary Section 4 5 8 9 winipa abe10 g jeusa xyq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eead e 8 4 Function that Saves the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium Manual Save Auto Save There are two methods in which the data are saved to the external storage medium manual save and auto save The external storage medium is inserted into the drive only when storing the data residing in the internal memory The data residing in the internal memory are saved to the external storage medium when the storage medium is inserted into the drive and press MEDIA key Whether to store the entire data in the memory or only the data that have not been saved is specified beforehand The external storage medium is placed in the drive at all times Data saving to the external storage medium is done automatically Note Even in the Auto Save mode the MEDIA key must be pressed to detect the external medium when it is first inserted into the drive Displayed data The display data in the internal memory are saved to the external storage medium at the specified i
256. mpling interval Mode Free Trigger Rotate Number of blocks number of memory divisions Data length file size Pre trigger position Type of trigger to use Channel selections for data acauisition 8 10 Measurement channels that data are to be acquired applies also to measurement channels for which to display the trend Computation channels that data are to be acquired applies also to computation channels for which to display the trend Storage media Name of the directory to which data are e saved 8 9 File header string 8 9 Range of data to be saved during manual save 8 9 Auto save interval during auto save 8 8 Save method to the to be storage media auto save or manual save 8 11 Memory end alarm option Minimum remaining amount of internal memory at which to generate the alarm 10 6 3 12 3 5 Configuring the Functions Settings related only to the computation channels configured on a screen dedicated to computation channels option Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Computation Computing equation e Display span specifications 11 4 Unit Constants 11 6 e Constants KO1 to K12 Alarm Alarm type 11 5 Alarm value 11 5 e Output relay ON OFF 11 5 e Output relay number 11 5 e Alarm delay time 6 3 Tag Channel display Tag name 7 1 Trent e Channel display color 7 8 e Computation channels to e Numb
257. mputation is started a computation icon is displayed in the status display section For details related to the status display section see section 4 2 Stopping the computation also stops the data acquisition to the internal memory 1 Press the STOP key A confirmation window is displayed For models with the batch function BT1 option the batch information is also displayed 2 Use the arrow keys to select Mem Math and press DISP ENTER to stop the computation At this point the data acquisition to the internal memory is also stopped The computation icon in the status display section also disappears Operation using the FUNC key 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu When the computation is suspended the Math START soft key is displayed If the computation is in progress the Math STOP soft key is displayed e Starting the computation 2 Press the Math START key to start the computation When the computation is started a computation icon is displayed in the status display section For details related to the status display section see section 4 2 Stopping the computation 2 Press the Math STOP key to stop the computation The computation icon in the status display section also disappears Nath STOP C 11 3 Using the Computation Function Resetting the Computation This is executable only when the computation is suspended Data from all computation channels are cleared Procedure 1 P
258. n 100 hours hours Less than 60 minutes minutes e n 16 The maximum number of event data files that can be written to the internal 5 memory is 16 16 represents this value n represents the number of files in the internal memory One file contains data that are acquired between start and stop operations The event data are overwritten for the following cases Be aware of these cases because data that are overwritten are lost When the event data storage area in the internal memory becomes full In such case Overwrite is displayed in the status display section When the number of files that remains to be saved to the external medium exceeds 16 4 3 4 2 Explanation of the Status Display Section When the trigger mode is set to Trigger or Rotate e Bar graph Displays the used space with respect to the specified memory length data length see section 8 11 When pretrigger is specified and the START key is pressed causing the RD MV100 to enter the trigger wait state data of size equal to the pretrigger amount are acquired to the internal memory The bar is displayed in orange After acquiring data of size equal to the pretrigger the length of the bar stays fixed However the relevant data are updated until the trigger is activated When the trigger is activated the bar turns green Data are acquired to the internal memory after the pretrigger data During the Trigger mode see sec
259. n 6 different positions See the figure below During trend vertical display The scale display position is 6 5 4 3 2 and 1 from the top 4 scale division sample 5 scale division sample 6 scale division sample 7 scale division sample 8 scale division sample 9 scale division sample 10 scale division sample 11 scale division sample 12 scale division sample 01 04 Imin div The scale is divided into 4 to 12 sections as shown in the figure above If the scales for two or more channels are specified to the same position the scale for the channel that was assigned first to the group is displayed Example 1 If the channels were assigned to a group in the following order 03 02 01 05 If the scale display positions for channels 3 2 1 and 5 are all set to 1 the scale for channel 3 is displayed at position 1 Vacant positions in between scale assigned positions are void The scales are displayed close together from the display position 1 Example 2 If the channels were assigned to a group in the following order 01 02 03 05 If the scale display position for channels 1 2 3 and 5 are set to positions 1 3 5 and 6 respectively the scales for the channels are actually displayed at positions 1 2 3 and 4 respectively If the scale display position is set to Off the scale is not displayed Scale marks The scale can be divided into 4 to 12 sections using the main scal
260. n be set in different zones so that they are easier to view In the example shown in the figure below channel 1 is displayed in the zone 0 to 30 channel 2 in the zone 30 to 60 and channel 3 in the zone 60 to 100 Normal display Zone display 100 100 LA YAK Zones CH3 L 60 ASV chiz I _ _7 _ Zone 2 L _ _ Zone 1 0 0 Explanation regarding the partial expansion display By compressing a section of the display scale of the measured computed data the remaining section of the display is expanded You specify a value on the display scale boundary value to be moved to another position on the display scale boundary value displacement position In the example shown in the figure below 0 V boundary value is moved to the 30 position of the display scale boundary value displacement position The section below the boundary accounts for 30 of the entire display represents 6 V to 0 V and the section above the boundary accounts for 70 of the entire display represents 0 V to 6 V Compressed portion Expanded portion of full display span of full display span 0 50 100 0 30 100 3 div 3 divi 2 div 2 div 1 div 1 div 0 0 1 div 1 di 2 div 2 div 3 div 3 div 6V 0 6V 6V 0 6V Measured value Measured value 1 3 Display Function Digit
261. n mode If you do not wish to save the new settings select No with the arrow key and press the DISP ENTER key to return to the operation mode Selecting Cancel with the arrow key and pressing the DISP ENTER key cancels the operation to exit the basic setting mode and returns to the basic setting mode menu In this case the setting changes made up to that point are held Key Operations in the Setting Mode Procedure Entering the setting mode 1 Press the MENU key to enter the setting mode 2 Press the soft key to enter individual setting screens Common key operations in the setting mode are described First CH Jat Last CH ai Range Hode Range Span L Span_U Cursor position RI av 2 000 2 000 bule olara Type Value Rly No 1 on H 1 000 on fat 2 fon t 1 100 fff 3 off 4 off Skip Volt TC RTD Next 1 2 T Setting selections selected using the soft keys 3 20 3 6 Common Key Operations Selecting the parameter 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The available selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen above the soft keys 2 Select the parameter with the soft key The box containing the parameter that was changed turns yellow The cursor moves to the next parameter To cancel the settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key Confirmin
262. n the upper limit See section 7 9 37 The display band is narrower than 4 of the entire display See section 7 9 40 Incorrect group set character string See section 7 6 41 There is no specified input channel See Communication Interface User s Manual 42 Exceeded the number of channels which can be set See Communication Interface User s Manual 43 A channel number cannot repeat in a group See section 7 6 45 There is no character string saved in the clipboard Copy a character string to the clipboard 46 The character string saved in the clipboard is too long Paste a character string with the specified number of characters 61 There is no channel specified by the MATH expression See section 11 4 62 MATH expression grammar is incorrect See section 11 2 63 MATH expression sequence is incorrect See section 11 2 64 MATH upper and lower span values are equal See section 11 4 70 The range of the MATH constant is exceeded See section 11 4 71 Set range of the MATH constant is exceeded See section 11 6 81 All space or quit string cannot be specified See section 10 4 83 Duplicate used combination of user ID and password See section 10 4 85 The login password is incorrect See section 10 1 86 The key lock release password is incorrect See section 10 1 87 This key is locked See section 10 1 88 This function is locked See section 10 1 89 Press FUNC key to login See section 10 3 12 1 Bunooys
263. nce computation channels 2 Can be specified only on measurement channels 6 7 suuely Pumas pue Huibpe mouyoy 6 3 Setting the Alarm Delay Period Procedure Set the alarm delay period for delayupper lower limit alarm These procedures are carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow Once new settings are confirmed they change back to white Press uw Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key Oon Setting on a computation channel option Twice press the softkey Next 1 3 To display the setting screen press the soft key 11 1 CO 7 First CH far Last cH far Tag oO Hoving average Count Off Alarm Delay Time 10 6 2 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here Tag Moving Average or Filter for measurement channels and Tag TLOG or Rolling Average for computation channels are also simultaneously set 2 Alarm delay period Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the alarm del
264. nd Action are displayed 6 Interval Set the time to the next timeout from 19 choices below 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 10 min 12 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6 h 8h 12h 24 h 7 Ref time Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the time Enter the time and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 8 Reset On Resets the TLOG value when the timer expires Off Does not reset the TLOG value when the timer expires 9 Action DataSave Stores the instantaneous values of all measurement computation channels to the internal memory when the time expires Off Does not store the TLOG data Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Acquiring the data of all channels to the internal memory at each interval setting at the Action box If Save data is specified in the Action box the instantaneous values of not only the channels set to compute the TLOG computation but also those of every channel can be acquired to the internal memory at the specified interval whether or not any channel is set to compute the TLOG computation has no relevance The data along with the TLOG data are written to the
265. nd time setting press the soft key oa p701712 23 38 16 1 YY MM DD HH MM SS Enter the date and time Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the date and time Enter the date and time and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numbers see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Pressing the DISP ENTER key closes the window without setting the DST box To cancel the setting and close the window press the ESC key 2 DST Daylight savings time adjustment function Summer or Winter is displayed in the DST box corresponding to the date and time indicated in the YY MM DD HH MM SS box when the window is opened Operate as follows to set Summer or Winter for the date and time entered Pressing the right arrow key shifts the cursol to the DST box Select Summer or Winter by the soft key and press the DISP ENTER key The window closes To cancel the setting and close the window press the ESC key before pressing the DISP ENTER key 3 23 suonesado uowwog 2poN UNy SHed JO SEWeN 7 Chapter 4 Switching Operation Screens 4 1 Operation Screens This chapter describes the screen operation screen used to display the measured computed data Status display section Paan wisitiiiy iiri Wri tiiii ly mir Data display section Sub menu Screen menu Displayed by pressing the DISP ENTER key The screen co
266. nd to the numbers in the above figure 1 First CH and Last CH Select the desired channels For the channels set here the Tag and Rolling average are also simultaneously set 2 Timer No This is the timer specified in the basic setting mode Select 1 2 or 3 3 Sumscale When the channel is computing TLOG SUM select Off s min or h The initial setting is Off You do not have to set this for channels that are not computing TLOG SUM leave it Off Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 11 17 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog 11 9 Setting the Timer Basic Setting Mode Procedure Up to three timers can be specified The timers specified here are used to determine the interval for the TLOG computation In addition all the data of measurement and computation channels can be saved at the interval determined by the timers These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys e The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw
267. ndition Saving the user name The user name is stored to the display and event data files at the following points when the display or event data acquisition starts and ends and when a message is written 10 5 suoun4 19410 2 10 4 Setting the Key Login Logout Functions Basic Setting Mode Procedure e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys e The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Press the softkey Next 1 3 To display the setting screen press the soft key Oal Key login Use Not Auto logout Off UserID Use Not Use Number On Off User name User ID Passward _ Enter setup Enable Use OONOD OF WH Not The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Note Use Not Select Use or Not If Use is selected items 2 3 4 5 6 8 and 9 are displayed Use Use key login Not Do not use key login Auto logout Select On or Off On Use the auto logout Off Do not use the auto logout User ID Use Not Use Use the user ID N
268. neee ereen aeneae aei 3 21 Snor MESSAGES inan ae aeai aar anaa aa ea NEA 12 1 Ethernet DOM asrsnunm aaar E A 3 3 OVEN AAA M O E E A E 8 4 IKEL E A AET E A A A E A 8 24 Pata lengt ossessi annia ii 8 24 MO E cast E A T 8 13 prege onsena eee 8 5 8 24 rotal a raa E Aaa T ANAT EE IRE 8 14 sampling interval esrin 8 24 SOtlING ic seis e E E E E riivdraces 8 24 SHAM STOP wesc cccsseecececuiaseccecunanecdenstevccesnnneecgernniesteennstets 8 13 OJEE rarena N 8 5 8 14 8 24 external storage medium condition eee eee 4 4 F FAIL Memory End srsrsnina serenita aa a e WINN O ea EEEE aE EE etd erettsds fleheader scvstevcccessvencccnapyenceceasuenzccereocecsssad ESERE filename sya ar e N D fi a a a a FIOPPY GSK sisissssaiai iiinn iaaa aR formatiD gaene aS fre SPACE sientini eiee E EEE EEEE TONU PANG cine E E E E FUNG KOV 22 fereis a T S functional ground terminal FUSE replacement isisisi inncan G QUOUP EE E E AA 1 5 2 Eo 0 FV e a reer renee err pee pert perenne rrr 4 5 4 7 4 19 SOUING MAREE ES EE T 7 8 H m E EEE ETET E E ten ieee 4 9 6 6 aE E E E A A A 4 9 6 6 IISTONICAl TENA sessie 1 12 from external storage medium eseseecsereee 9 6 9 7 eee g a E EE E E EE 4 18 NOUNY TEPOM insni a 11 22 11 26 information Sereemm iiaia asariari initializing setup data INPUT CERMINA sossnsosns nee tens INPUT TYPO iena a Ee oe integran UME ia a Na internal memory CAPACI osni ir eee eed E E leaning
269. nel 7 1 While data acquisition is running 1 When AUTO mode is selected in save mode on memory related SETUP menu See previous page 2 Periodically or when you press STOP key data saved into external medium Section 8 4 8 7 7 Data saving to external medium 2 When MANUAL mode is selected in save mode on memory related SETUP menu See previous page 2 Press key Section 8 4 8 7 7 2 While data acquisition is stopped Section 9 2 Setting mode Menu display Press Every data stored in internal memory is copied to external medium Operation screen Monitor display Press MENU Setting mode Menu display Press OMEGA Foreword Notes Trademarks Revisions Disk No RE25 1st Edition March 2000 YK All Rights Reserved Copyright OMEGA Thank you for purchasing the OMEGA MobileCorder RD MV100 This User s Manual contains useful information about the functions installation wiring operating procedures and troubleshooting of the RD MV100 To ensure correct use please read these manuals thoroughly before operation Keep this manual in a safe place for quick reference in the event a question arises In addition a quick reference is provided on the previous page This reference briefly explains operations that are used frequently Separate this reference from the manual for use The following three manuals including this one are provided as manuals for
270. nel 1 multiplied by constant number 3 Division 01 K02 Computes the value of channel 1 divided by constant number 2 Note When you set an expression as e g 31 31 01 the summation of channel number 1 will be displayed in channel 31 Power SQR ABS LOG EXP Computations The types of data that can be used in equations are measurement channels computation channels constants KO1 to K12 communication interface data C01 to C12 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 You can nest a computing element inside the parentheses of another computing element EXAMPLE Power xx 01xx02 Raises measured value of channel 1 to the power of measured value of channel 2 Square root SQR SQR 01 Returns the square root of the measured value of channel 1 Absolute value ABS ABS 01 Returns the absolute value of the measured value of channel 1 Logarithm LOG LOG 01 Returns the common logarithm of the measured value of channel 1 Exponent EXP EXP 01 Raises e to the power of the measured value of channel 1 Note The natural logarithm is not directly provided but can be obtained by using the following logpx logax logab or Inx logx loge Therefore to calculate the natural logarithm of the value of channel 01 set KO1 1 Then the expression will become LOG 01 LOG EXP K01 11 2 Explanation of Computing Equations Relational Computation The types of data that can be u
271. ng as the format type is the same as those indicated above 3 6 3 4 Run Mode There are three run modes on the recorder operation setting and basic setting This section describes the functions and relationships of the three modes Mode Types Mode types Power ON Operation mode Operation screens lt END soft key DISP ENTER MENU MENU or ESC Setting mode Basic setting mode Menu screen Pressing FUNC for 3 seconds Menu screen Soft key ESC MENU or Soft key ESC Setting screens Setting screens Mode Type Description Possible Operations Operation mode This mode is used for daily operation This mode is entered when the power is turned ON Monitoring operation Data acquisition Setting mode This mode is used to configure the recorder operation such as input range and alarms This mode is entered by pressing the MENU key in the operation mode Measured data cannot be displayed in this mode Operations such as measurements alarm detection and data acquisition are continued Setting the operation Operation related to the file on the external storage medium Basic setting mode Setup mode This mode is used to configure the basic environment of the recorder such as the input format and the data stora
272. ng interval Sampling Interval for Event Data RD MV102 RD MV104 Selectable from 125 250 500 ms and 1 2 5 10 30 60 120s RD MV106 RD MV112 Selectable from 1 2 5 10 30 60 and 120s File types The following two file types can be created e Event data file stores instantaneous values acquired periodically at a specified sampling interval e Display data file stores the maximum and minimum values for each sampling interval from among measured data acquired at scan intervals Files can be created in the following combinations a Event data file only for trigger mode display data file b Display data file only c Event data file only Data format Binary Data size per channel Display data Measurement data 4 bytes datum computation data 8 bytes datum suonesiioeds fa Event data Measurement data 2 bytes datum computation data 4 bytes datum Trigger function Event data Selectable from Free Trigger or Rotate Display data Event data Selectable from Trigger or Rotate Sampling length The sampling length the maximum data length can be derived from the following equation Sampling length the maximum number of data points per channel x sampling interval Maximum number of data points per channel calculated from internal memory capacity types of data data size and number of measurment or computation channels data to be stored 14 5 14 3 Data Storage Specifications Interna
273. ng numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 10 20 10 12 Using the Daylight Savings Time Adjustment Function Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key suoioung 48410 2 10 21 10 13 Setting the Temperature Unit Basic Setting Mode Procedure Select the temperature unit from C or F These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys e The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key Oon Temperature ES 1 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Temperature Unit Select C or F C Celsius F Fahrenheit Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press
274. ng the Alarm Delay Period 11 13 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog 11 6 Setting Constants Procedure Explanation Total of 12 constants KO1 to K12 can be defined e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Twice press the softkey Next 1 3 To display the setting screen press the soft key 10 Constant Kal KB 7 1 ce kefi K S 1 Kil 1 ke T Kan The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Constant Set the constant Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 E Used when setting numbers with exponents Example 5 0E 12 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press t
275. ng the display update rate see section 7 3 Display Update 1min 2min 5min 10min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h Rate div Sampling interval 2 4 10 20 40 60 120 240 480 of displayed data s Displayed information The following Information can be displayed Information Description All channel display All the channels that were set to display the trend are displayed on one trend screen Sections 4 3 and 8 10 Message display Messages specified by the user can be displayed at arbitrary points in time For example by displaying a message when a certain operation is carried out the point at which the operation is carried out can be seen visually Displayed messages are stored Sections 7 4 and 7 5 Display direction of waveforms The waveform can be displayed vertically or horizontally The vertical display is in the same direction as the chart recorder and is convenient when the RD MV100 is used with the chart recorder Section 7 13 Displayed color of waveforms The displayed color of waveforms can be specified for each channel The color also applies to the bar graph display Section 7 8 Thickness of waveform lines You can select from three types 1 2 or 3 dots The specified thickness of waveform lines applies to all channels gt Section 7 13 Trip line display Displays a line to indicate a particular value of interest trip line for each group You can select the thickness o
276. ng the error log see section 10 5 9 1 Saving Loading Setup Data Saving Setup Data In the Basic Setting Mode Saves the setup data set in both the setting mode and the basic setting mode to the external storage medium The function is the same as that in the setting mode Procedure e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Press the soft key Next 1 3 Press soft key to display the Save Load Initialize menu screen Press a soft key to display the Save settings screen Save settings File name File name Time File list SAITO PNL 2000 01 15 83 27 KATSU PNL 1999 09 14 15 47 1 Enter the name of the setup data file to be saved Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string up to 8 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 To cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Initialize menu press the ESC key Note The extension PNL will automatically be added to the file name The following character combinations cannot be used as file names AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK All spaces are not allowed for file names Spaces
277. np n abe10 sg jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uonisinboy eead e 8 1 Data Types to be Acquired and Saved File name File names are automatically assigned month day hour minute of the first sampled data serial number extension for display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data option and report data option Display data file Mddhhmma DDS Event data file Mddhhmma DEV Manual sampled data file Mddhhmma DMN TLOG data file Mddhhmma DTG Hourly report data file Mddhhmma DHR Daily report data file Mddhhmma DDR Weekly report data file Mddhhmma DWR Monthly report data file Mddhhmma DMR where M month 1 to 9 X 10 Y 11 Z 12 dd date hh hour mm minute a serial number Note The serial number of the file name is set to 0 However if the display data acquisition is started stopped and restarted within one minute for example then the file name of the two files will have serial numbers 0 and 1 for the first and second files respectively The two files will have the same Mddhhmm month day hour minute section 8 2 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data The display and event data are acquired by specifying the channels sampling interval file size and other information Specifying the Data to be Acquired Display data and event data Specify the type of data to be acquired depending on the application Several examples are shown below Please use them as referen
278. nputs DI Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key The following table shows the values Filter Moving Average Value Description Filter Off Do not use the filter 2s Filter time constant 2 s 5s Filter time constant 5 s 10s Filter time constant 10 s Moving Average Off Do not use moving average 2to16 Number of data samples for the moving average 5 14 5 9 Setting the A D Integration Time Scan Interval Burnout and Reference Junction Compensation Basic Setting Mode Set the integration time of the input A D converter scan interval thermocouple input burnout and reference junction compensation RJC Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Press To display the setting screen press the soft key Oon First CH 81 Last CH A D Integrate Scan interval Burnout set Off RJC Volt iuw C for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode a
279. nsists of the status display section and the data display section The operation screen includes trend digital bar graph alarm summary message summary memory summary report option and historical trend The arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key are used to switch the screen Screen menu Displayed when the DISP ENTER key is pressed Sub menu Displayed when the right arrow key is pressed while the screen menu is displayed The following operations are possible e For trend digital and bar graph displays the displayed group can be automatically switched e Recalling the historical trend at the time the alarm selected in the Alarm Summary occured or the message selected in the Message Summary is written Also displaying the historical trend selected in the Memory Summary Switching to the trend or bar graph screen that contains the channel data pointed on the overview screen Arrow keys JOO CD DISP ENTER key 4 1 su 1995 uopesado BulyosywMs gt 4 2 Explanation of the Status Display Section The following information is displayed in the status display section during the operation mode and the setting mode The information is not displayed in the basic setting mode Setup Mode is displayed instead 5 1 em ic zie pt E ee He fe 1 0 e l 6 1 Free ode 6 2 Trigger or Rotate mode E gt el B ir e a c i
280. nterval auto save interval see section 8 8 Event data e During the free mode The event data in the internal memory are saved to the external storage medium at the specified interval data length see section 8 11 e During trigger or rotate mode After acquiring the data to the internal memory over the specified period data length see section 8 11 the event data in the internal memory are saved to the external storage medium The following figure shows the operation when the acquisition area in the internal memory is divided using the trigger mode Data save to the external storage medium First block Second block Last block Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition N N N i Trigger wait Trigger wait Trigger wait i Trigger activated gt Trigger activated S gt Trigger activated Stop Manual sampled data The first time manual sample is executed a manual sampled data file is created on the external storage medium The data are appended to this file for each successive manual sample operation Note _____ If the external storage medium is not inserted the unsaved data are saved the first time when manual sample is executed after the external storage medium is inserted 8 10 8 4 Function that Saves the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium TLOG data The first time TLOG computation is executed a TLOG computation data file is create
281. nu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key Select ALL CHANNEL or GROUP CHANNEL using the up and down arrow keys The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu SCALE OFF izg INFOR p DIGITAL OFF MATION JAUTO SCROLL ON fee TREND 2 HISTORY Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key 4 6 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Displaying or clearing the numerical section on the trend screen This operation is carried out on the Trend screen 1 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen menu Trend is selected Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key Select DIGITAL ON or DIGITAL OFF using the up and down keys The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays clears the numerical section To close the menu without displaying clearing the numerical section press the ESC key Changing the group on the display screen The following three methods are available If all channel display is selected waveforms for all channels that are registered to display the trend see section 8 10 are displayed even when the group is changed Changing the group on the display screen from the screen menu 1 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu Pressing the right arrow key
282. nu display display Section 5 1 to 5 7 Section 7 3 8 8 Set range and alarm setting Set Time div and Auto save value by using soft keys interval by using soft keys character number input Set messages and other keys and operation key parameters if required Press key 2 times to go back to the monitor display Operation screen Monitor display OMEGA MV100 Quick Reference 4 Flow chart of basic setting Memory and communication related function setting Power on Section 3 2 Monitor display Section 4 1 Press MENU then press FUNC key for 3 seconds Basic Setting mode menu Section 3 6 Press Memory related Basic Setting menu Communication Basic Setting menu Section 8 11 Manual M3643 Set save mode data type Set network related parameter such sample rate and pre trigger as IP address and subnet mask by if required by using soft using soft keys operation key and keys and operation key character number input keys Press key and select End Jon function menu to go back to the monitor display Monitor display OMEGA MV100 Quick Reference 5 Start stop of data acquisition into internal memory 1 Press to start data storage into the internal memory 2 Press to stop data storage Section 8 5 8 6 6 Switching operation screens Trend Digital Bar 1 Use DISP ENTER key J Section 4 1 to 4 7 Overniew Infor Trend 4 mation History Pa
283. o model types Constant K01 to K12 Numerical value Initial setting is 1 Tag Tag Character string Initial setting is all space TLOG Timer No 3 Sum scale min h Rolling On Off average Interval 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s 10s 12s 15s 20s 30s 1 min 2 min 3 min 4min 5 min 6 min 10 min 12 min 15 min 20 min 30 min th Number 1 to 64 Numerical value of samples Alarm delay time 1s to 3600s Numerical value xipueddy z App 3 Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Basic Setting Mode Initial settings are thick framed Parameters Notes Alarm Reflash Relay AND 101 102 101 103 Up to model types 101 106 Action Behavior Indicator Rate of change Increase 3 4 Decrease 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 Hysterisis On Jof A D Integrate Auto 50Hz 60 Hz 100 ms 100 ms is for DX106 and RD MV112 dnly Scaninterval 1125ms 250 ms RD MV102 RD MV104 is ss 2s RD MV106 RD MV112 Burnout set Off Up Down RJC Internal External Volt uV Numerical value Memory Save Auto Manual Data E D Event Event Sample 125 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1s 125 ms 250 ms and 500 ms are rate 25 5s 10s 30s for RD MV102 and RD MV104 only 60s 120s Mode Free Trigger Rotate Block 1 2 4 8 1 2 and 4 when Data is set to 16 E
284. o set each parameter are the same as those described for Acquiring only the event data Free is not selectable Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Choices for the data length The maximum value of the data length varies depending on the sampling interval It is also dependent on the type of data to be acquired display data and event data or event data only and the number of measurement and computation channels to be acquired See section 8 6 The available choices for the data length are displayed on the soft key menu See the table below Sample 0 125 0 25 0 5 1 2 5 10 30 60 120 Rate s Data length 3min 3min 3min 3min 3min choices 5min 5min 5min 5min 5min 10min 10 min 10 min 10 min 10 min 10 min 10 min 20 min 20 min 20 min 20 min 20 min 20 min 20 min 30 min 30 min 30 min 30 min 30 min 30 min 30 min 1h 1h th 1h 1h th th 1h th th 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 8h 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1 day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 7day 7day 7day 7 day 10 day 10 day 10 day 10 day 14 day 14 day 14 day 31 day 31 day 8 25
285. ocedure Explanation Set the input filter for RD MV102 RD MV 104 low pass filters or the moving average of the input for RD MV106 RD MV1 12 e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys e The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press rew To display the setting screen press the soft key Oon 1 1 l i _ oal First CH fal Last cH far First CH fal Last cH for Tag Tag et Filter Off 2 Hoving average Count Off 3 Alarm Delay Time 18 s Alarm Delay Time 10 s The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here Tag and Alarm Delay Time are also simultaneously set Input filter setting for RD MV102 RD MV104 2 Filter Filter Select Off or set the time constant of the filter Moving average setting for RD MV106 RD MV112 3 Moving Average Count Select Off or set the number of data points for the moving average Note Regardless of this setting filter and moving average operations are not performed for the digital i
286. oft key Next 1 3 To display the setting screen press the soft key 11 1 Mel First CH BI Last CH Br Tag TLOG Timer No 1 Sum scale off Rolling average Interval 18s Number of samples 1 Alarm Delay Time 18s ARON The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here the Tag and TLOG are also simultaneously set 2 On Off On Use rolling average Off Do not use rolling average If On is selected Interval and Number of samples are displayed 3 Interval Select the interval from the selections below However when the scan interval is set to 2 s even if the sampling interval is set to 1 s 3 s 5 s or 15 s the sampling will be performed at 2 s 4 s 6 s or 16 s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5gs 6s 10s 12s 15s 20 s 30 s 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 10 min 12 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 1 h 4 Number of samples This is the number of data points used to compute the rolling average Set an integer value between 1 and 64 11 20 11 10 Using the Rolling Average Explanation Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key e Wh
287. omega com FAX 001 203 359 7807 info omega com mx Servicing Europe Postbus 8034 1180 LA Amstelveen The Netherlands TEL 31 0 20 3472121 FAX 31 0 20 6434643 Toll Free in Benelux 0800 0993344 e mail nl omega com Rud arm dy 1868 733 01 Karvin 8 TEL 420 0 69 6311899 FAX 420 0 69 6311114 Toll Free 0800 1 66342 e mail czech omega com 9 rue Denis Papin 78190 Trappes TEL 33 0 130 621 400 FAX 33 0 130 699 120 Toll Free in France 0800 4 06342 e mail france omega com Daimlerstrasse 26 D 75392 Deckenpfronn Germany TEL 49 0 7056 9398 0 FAX 49 0 7056 9398 29 Toll Free in Germany 0800 639 7678 e mail germany omega com One Omega Drive River Bend Technology Centre Northbank Irlam Manchester M44 5EX United Kingdom TEL 44 0 161 777 6611 FAX 44 0 161 777 6622 Toll Free in United Kingdom 0800 488 488 e mail sales omega co uk It is the policy of OMEGA to comply with all worldwide safety and EMC EMI regulations that apply OMEGA is constantly pursuing certification of its products to the European New Approach Directives OMEGA will add the CE mark to every appropriate device upon certification The information contained in this document is believed to be correct but OMEGA Engineering Inc accepts no liability for any errors it contains and reserves the right to alter specifications without notice WARNING These products are not designed for use in and should not be used for patient
288. ommunication Errors An English error message is returned via the communication interface It is not displayed on the screen Code Message 400 Input username 401 Input password 402 Select username from admin or user 403 Login incorrect try again 404 No more login at the specified level is acceptable 410 Login successful The special user level 411 Login successful The general user level 420 Connection has been lost 421 The number of simultaneous connection has been exceeded 422 Communication has timed out Note For information regarding the communication function of this recorder see the RD MV100 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 12 6 12 1 A List of Messages Status Messages Code Message 500 Execution is complete 501 Please wait a moment 503 Data are being saved to media 504 File is being loaded from media 505 Formatting 506 Memory save to media was interrupted 507 Exchange media to continue the saving operation 510 Range cannot be changed during sampling or calculating 511 MATH expression cannot be changed during sampling or calculating 512 Because memory save is manual mode FTP is not available 520 Connecting to the line 521 The data file is being transferred 551 FTP test is being executed Cautions Code Message Ref Section 600
289. onace EEEa ss SRN 5 9 Contents 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 Square Root Computation Setting cere eee eens snes iis 5 11 SKID Setting iinta E a aE EES assess vabiaeat irae deca 5 13 Input Filter and Moving Average Setting cc cccccssessssssseneenescsseseesssessssessaraseetenensasiee 5 14 Setting the A D Integration Time Scan Interval Burnout and Reference Junction Compensation Basic Setting MOJE isssissirsrsrnsssensisusrsd anses are 5 15 Chapter 6 Acknowledging and Setting Alarms Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay Option 0 0 eee 6 1 Alarm SOUNO vivstecstcssiscscnetsstecives tenner tesertetastvasdetseatesstisccastendeneccesinsteaarssdecsarsecueaesencsevaceats 6 5 Seiting the Alarm Delay PGMs cz cacstisacaskcctacsastadaansncatecacchstseeasnssscdyel saccnsesicessavaceastasbes 6 8 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function Basic Setting Mode cecceseeeseeeneeteeeeneeee 6 10 Setting and Operating the Display 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 Ia 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 SOtting Tag NAMES secveivssecsetneiessveserscnacdesesastvettaneeectacctciesedtessd ies atendeaderse catnasesctessttactsceteats 7 1 Selecting Tag Display or Channel Display Basic Setting Mode eseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 2 Setting the Display Rate Trend 0 0 0 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeeeseeesenneesaeeeeeeeeeeesas 7 3 Usin
290. onthly reports Size of the header section size of the data section of one report data set 3055 bytes 40 report data sets of monthly reports Size of the header section 40 x size of the data section of one report data set 83317 bytes 40 report data sets is the maximum number of report data sets that can be written in the internal memory If there are more than 40 data sets they are cleared starting with the oldest data set Note When the measurement and computation channel data enter the condition described in the following table status E and O are output in the report Data Condition Status Common to measurement and computation channels Measurement error or computation error E For measurement channels Plus over range O Minus over range O Over range occurs when the input type is voltage and the input exceeds 5 of the measurable range For example consider the case when the measurement range is 2 V and the measurable range is from 2 000 to 2 000 V If the input signal exceeds 2 200 V over range occurs If the input signal falls below 2 200 V over range occurs Over range occurs when the input type is TC thermocouple or RTD resistance temperature detector and the input exceeds approximately 10 C of the measurable range For example consider the case when the measurement range is R and the measurable range is from 0 0 to 1760 0 C If the input signal exceeds approximately
291. or computation TLOG timer number and computing unit 3 10 3 5 Configuring the Functions Configuration Details The configuration details of the setting mode and the basic setting mode are shown below Enclosed in parentheses are reference sections Settings related to the input Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Scan interval e Scan interval Input specifications 5 1 to 5 7 Input type Measurement range Upper and lower limit of span Reference channel for differential computation Upper and lower limits of scale Unit Burnout 5 9 e Burn out Off Up Down Reference junction compensation e Switch between Internal and External Compensation voltage when set to External Noise elimination Filter time constant Off RD MV102 Integration time of the A D RD MV104 5 8 converter 5 9 Number of samples for the moving average Off RD MV106 RD MV1 12 5 8 Settings related to the alarm Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Alarm Alarm type 6 2 e Display hold non hold 6 4 Alarm value 6 2 e The time interval for the rate of Output relay On Off 6 2 change alarm for measurement Output relay number 6 2 channels only 6 4 Alarm delay time 6 3 e Hysteresis for measurement channels only 6 4 Alarm output relay operation option 6 4 e Reflash alarm e AND operation e Relay energize de energize Relay hold non hold
292. or more e Adjusts the internal clock of the RD MV100 to the nearest hour depending on the time when the remote signal is applied Time of Signal Input New Time 00 min 00 s to 01 min 59 s Adjusts the internal clock down to the nearest hour Example 10 hr 01 min 50 s becomes 10 hr 00 min 00 s 02 min 00 s to 57 min 59 s Time is unchanged 58 min 00 s to 59 min 59 s Adjusts the internal clock down to the nearest hour Example 10 hr 59 min 50 s becomes 11 hr 00 min 00 s Math option e Remote input Rising start falling stop e Starts stops the computation This is valid only on models with the computation function M1 option e Ifthe computation is started applying a rising signal produces no effect If the computation is stopped applying a falling signal produces no effect Math rst option e Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e Resets the data on all computation channels This is valid only on models with the computation function M1 option and while the computation is stopped For all other cases applying the remote signal produces no effect M sample e Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e The instantaneous values of all measurement and computation channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off can be stored to the internal memory 10 12 10 7 Setting the Remote Control Functions Option R1 Basic Set
293. ot Do not use the user ID If Use is selected item 7 User ID appears For models with the batch function The key login function of all users 1 to 7 item 4 turns Off item 5 when User ID is changed to Use from Not Number This is the user registration number 1 to 7 Select the user number to be set On Off Set whether or not to enable the key login function for the selected user Even if the user name and other parameters below are specified the login function cannot be used if it is turned Off here On Enable the key login function for the selected user Off Disable the key login function for the selected user 10 6 10 4 Setting the Key Login Logout Functions Basic Setting Mode 6 User name Enter the user name up to 16 alphanumeric characters Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Note e For models with the batch function BT1 option duplicate user names cannot be registered See Confirming operation below quit cannot be used as the user name All spaces are also not allowed for the user name 7 UserID Enter the user ID up to 4 alphanumeric characters Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures relat
294. ower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the difference between the measured values of two channels becomes smaller than or equal to the alarm value Can be specified only on difference computation channels Upper limit on rate of change alarm The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is checked An alarm occurs when the amount of increase becomes greater than or equal to the specified value Can be specified only on measurement channels e Lower limit on rate of change alarm The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is checked An alarm occurs when the amount of decrease becomes greater than or equal to the specified value Can be specified only on measurement channels 1 5 Alarm Function Upper limit on rate of change alarm Lower limit on rate of change alarm ae a R alarm j o 7 lt Measured Measured 2 value T2 value lt a Variation Variation Th IT2 T1 T2 T1 o Ti t 3 f N TN Sy c r alarm 5 z ti t2 Time gt t te Time gt gt ec Interval Interval 2 t2 t1 tz t1 The interval is defined by the following equation and is set in terms of the number of measured data points Interval Scan interval x number of measurements Alarm hysteresis This applies to upper and lower limit alarms on measurement channels A width hysteresis can be specified on the value used to
295. ox and check the contents before operating the instrument If some of the contents are not correct or missing or if there is physical damage contact the dealer from which you purchased them RD MV100 Main Unit There is a name plate on the back side of the key panel cover Open the cover and check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate match those on the order MODEL Model Code Suffix Code Optional Code Description RD MV102 RD MV100 2 ch RD MV104 RD MV100 4 ch RD MV106 RD MV100 6 ch RD MV112 RD MV100 12 ch External storage 1 Floppy disk medium Zip disk ATA flash memory card PCMCIA 20MB Language English deg F DST English standard software included Power supply 100 to 120 VAC 200 to 240 VAC 12 VDC Power inlet power cord 3 Pin power inlet with UL CSA cable 3 Pin power inlet with VDE cable 3 Pin power inlet with SAA cable vojno 3 Pin power inlet with BS cable Options A1 Alarm output relay 2 relays remote control A2 Alarm output relay 4 relays remote control A3 Alarm output relay 6 relays C2 RS 232 interface C3 RS 422 A 485 interface IFA FAIL memory end output relay H3 Screw terminal M1 Computation function report function included R1 Remote
296. oximately 12 KB This operation is carried out in the operation mode The images of soft keys or messages are not saved 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Snapshot soft key The screen image is saved to the external storage medium Cc File format Screen image data is in PNG format File name File names are automatically assigned Month date hour and minute when the screen image data were stored serial number to screen image data files Mddhhmma PNG where M month 1 to 9 X 10 Y 11 Z 12 dd date hh hour mm minute a serial number Note The serial number of the file name is normally set to 0 However if the screen image data is saved twice within a minute for example then the file name of the two files will have serial numbers 0 and 1 for the first and second files respectively The two files will have the same Mddhhmm month day hour minute section ejeg BHuilziyeniuy pue sai4 Huibeuey el 9 7 Clearing Data from the Internal Memory Procedure Clears display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data option report data option and logs from the internal memory e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press the softkey Next 1 3 Press 7 soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Twice press the soft key Next 1 3
297. p 3 the area on either side of the boundary is expanded or compressed Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter the boundary and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 The range for the boundary The minimum value of the span 1 to the maximum value of the span 1 when the range is not set to scaling The minimum value of the scale 1 to the maximum value of the scale 1 when the range is set to scale Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Note e The partial expansion display is turned OFF for all channels if the partial expansion display setting use not use in the basic setting mode is changed and stored When the range setting of the channel is set to Skip or when the span width is less than or equal to 1 the partial expanded display cannot be specified The box is grayed in this case 7 21 Aejdsiq y Buneiado pue Huas 7 12 Setting Whether or Not to Use the Partial Expansion Display Basic Setting Mode Procedure Set whether or not to use the partial expansion display e The initial value is Not e The display specifications of the partial expansion display are set in th
298. p 7 Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Number of data sets and file size The file size of 50 data sets for 30 measurement channels is calculated as follows Size of the header section 50 x size of the data section of one data set 14019 bytes 50 data sets is the maximum number of mamual sampled data sets that can be written in the internal memory If there are more than 50 data sets they are overwritten starting with the oldest data set Note Plus minus over range in measurement channels Over range occurs when the input type is voltage and the input exceeds 5 of the measurable range For example consider the case when the measurement range is 2 V and the measurable range is from 2 000 to 2 000 V If the input signal exceeds 2 200 V over range occurs If the input signal falls below 2 200 V over range occurs Over range occurs when the input type is TC thermocouple or RTD resistance temperature detector and the input exceeds approximately 10 C of the measurable range For example consider the case when the measurement range is R and the measurable range is from 0 0 to 1760 0 C If the input signal exceeds approximately 1770 0 C over range occurs If the input signal falls below approximately 10 0 C over range occurs Plus minus computation overflow in computation channels Plus computation overflow occures when the value exceeds 3 4E 38 Minus computat
299. played In addition the amount of free space is also displayed e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press the softkey Next 1 3 Press 7 soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press the soft key Next 1 3 Press 6 soft key to display the File list screen File list Directory File name ET1 PNL 2000 01 01 00 26 File list A PNL 2000 01 01 64 18 AAAG PNL 2000 01702 00 53 SETZ PNL 2000 01 01 66 35 882 SAITO PNL 2000 01 15 63 27 ATSU PNL 1999 09714 15 47 R180 M L2H _ 1999 08 28 10 32 Free space WRSUBQG L2H 1999 08 17 22 56 90472 Kbytes 1 The directories in the external storage medium are displayed Using the arrow keys select the directory Files in the directory are listed to the right is the root directory 2 Pressing the right arrow key moves the cursor to the file list The list can be scrolled using the arrow keys To move back to the Directory name column press the left arrow key 3 Free space Displays the amount of free space on the external storage medium 4 Press the ESC key to return to the Save Load Clear data menu screen 9 5 Managing Files Displaying Free Space on the External Storage Medium Deleting Files and Directories on the External Storage Medium In the Setting Mode Procedure Deletes files and directories on the external stor
300. ppears External OORO Na The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Setting the integration time of the input A D converter 1 A D Integration time Select from Auto 50 Hz 60 Hz and 100 ms using soft keys RD MV102 RD MV104 Auto 50 Hz 60 Hz RD MV106 RD MV112 Auto 50 Hz 60 Hz 100 ms AUTO automatically switches 20 16 7 ms 50 Hz fixed to 20 ms 60 Hz fixed to 16 7 ms 100 ms fixed to 100 ms the scan interval is 2 s Setting the scan interval 2 Scan interval Input signals are scanned at every scan interval For the models with computation function M1 the computation carried out at every scan interval RD MV102 RD MV104 125 ms 250 ms RD MV106 RD MV112 1 s 2 s when the A D integration time is 100 ms 2 s only Setting the thermocouple input burnout and setting the reference junction compensation This setting is void for all ranges other than the TC 3 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 5 15 sBuijes jauueyo jusweinseay 7 5 9 Setting the A D Integration Time Scan Interval Burnout and Reference Junction Compensation Basic Setting Mode Explanation 4 Burnout Select from Off Up and Down Off Disable the burnout function Up When the thermocouple burns out the measured result is set to positive over range XxxXxx Down When the thermocouple b
301. private protocol Modbus protocol Synchronization method Start stop asynchronous transmission Connection method RS 422 A 485 4 wire half duplex multi drop connection 1 N where N 1 to 31 Transmission speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps Data length 7 or 8 bits Stop bit 1 bit Parity Odd even or none Communication distance RS 422 A 485 Up to 1200 m Communication mode ASCII for input output for control and setting ASCII or binary for output of measured data Modbus Mode RTU SLAVE Data type Data read data write Wiring 4 wires for RS 422 A 485 Fail Memory End Output F1 The relay contact output on the rear panel informs of the occurrence of a system error Another relay contact output informs of the time until end of the internal memory space selectable from 1 2 5 10 20 50 or 100 hours before the data is overwritten or of the time when the remaining space on the external storage medium reaches to 10 of whole capacity Relay contact rating 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 A 250 VDC 0 1 A for resistance load 14 10 14 6 Specifications of Optional Functions Clamped Input Terminal H2 Clamped input terminal is used for input terminal Desk Top Type H5 J Provides carrying handle and power cord when H5D H5F H5R or H5u is specified Computation Functions M1 Can perfom computation display the computed data assigned to channels in trends and numerical v
302. r setting the LCD brightness see section 7 14 Do not install the instrument in the following places In direct sunlight or near heat sources Install the recorder in a place with small temperature fluctuations near room temperature 23 C Placing the instrument in direct sunlight or near heat sources can cause adverse effects on the internal circuitry Where an excessive amount of soot steam moisture dust or corrosive gases are present Soot steam moisture dust and corrosive gases will adversely affect the recorder Avoid such locations Near strong magnetic field sources Do not bring magnets or instruments that produce electromagnetic fields close to the recorder Operating the recorder in strong magnetic fields can cause errors in the measurements Bad angle for viewing the screen Because the recorder uses a 5 5 TFT color LCD it is difficult to view the display from an extreme angle Please install the recorder so that the monitor can be viewed from the front 2 2 2 3 Input Signal Wiring A CAUTION If a strong tension is applied to the cable wired to the recorder the terminals of the recorder and or the cable can be damaged In order to prevent tension from being applied directly on the terminals fasten all wiring cables to the rear of the mounting panel Precautions to be taken while Wiring Take the following precautions when wring the input signal cables It is recommended that crimp on lu
303. r the report data being displayed However if there are less than 10 data sets the most recent report data with the maximum report data number are displayed Displays the report data that is 10 data sets before the report data being displayed However if there are less than 10 data sets the oldest report data report data number 1 are displayed 4 15 su 19 5 uopesado BulyouMs gt 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Explanation Alarm summary Number of the alarm information displayed at the bottom of the screen Number of the alarm information in the internal memory Tag Channel Alarm No 1 2 3 4 Type H L h I R r T t Date amp Time Alarm activated t t t t 006 006 Channel Tare Alarm IN Time Alam OT Time Date amp Time Cursor e1 iH Jan 9 01 13 13 Jan 09 01 13 33 Jang 01 12 14 Jan 09 81 12 25 Alarm released H Jan 09 01 11 07 Jang 01 1H Jan 09 01 10 58 Jan 09 G1 H Jan G9 01 10 54 Jan 09 Gi 1 10 03 8 0l T eeece heau N Mark gt 6 1 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay Option Message summary Number of the message displayed at the bottom of the screen Number of the messages in the internal memory Message Date and time the message was written PT i DOAA Ta Cursor POER OFF Jan 09 2000 01 07 34 STOP Jan 09 2000 01 07 09 INPUT Jan 09 2000 01 05 41 POWER ON Jan 09 20
304. rEg 1 User name The user name is displayed when a user is logged in using the key login function 2 Group name or screen name The name of the group or screen that is displayed in the data display section ALL is displayed only during all channel display see section 4 3 3 Current date and time The current date and time are displayed 4 ON OFF state of the measured computed data acquisition A and B are displayed alternately Data acquisition in progress or waiting for the event data trigger C Data acquisition is suspended Note For event data that starts acquiring data upon receiving a trigger the indicator indicates that the data acquisition is in progress even when it is in the trigger wait state The trigger wait state can be identified using the bar graph described in item 6 4 2 4 2 Explanation of the Status Display Section 5 The usage condition of the display data storage area in the internal memory This is displayed when display data acquisition is enabled Note Bar graph Displays the used space of the display data storage area Time period The remaining time for acquiring the display data When the remaining time is less than one hour the time is displayed in units of minutes Remaining memory Unit Greater than or equal to 100 days 1 Percentage of the remaining area with respect to the display data acquisition area Greater than or equal to 100 hours less than 100 days days unit less than on
305. rage Count off Alarm Delay Time 10 s Alarm Delay Time 10 s The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the measurement channels set here Moving Average or Filter and Alarm Delay Time are also simultaneously set For the computation channels TLOG Rolling Average and Alarm Delay Time are also simultaneously set 2 Tag Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the tag name Enter the tag name up to 16 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 7 1 Aejdsig y Buneiado pue Huys 7 2 Selecting Tag Display or Channel Display Basic Setting Mode Procedure Select whether tags or channel numbers are to be displayed on the operation screen trend display digital display etc The initial setting is Channel Tag names are set in the setting mode e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter
306. re canceled in the following cases When the input type is changed Volt TC etc When the input range is changed When displaying the scale or computing the square root and the measurement span or scaling value is changed includes decimal position change e Ifthe range setting is set to Skip alarm setting is not possible The alarm setting boxes are grayed in this case These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow Once new settings are confirmed they change back to white 1 mooo o First CH fat Last cH far Range Hode Range Span L Span_U Volt av 2 000 2 000 et Type Value Rly No 1 fi n 1 000 on flat 2 on t 1 108 on i92 3 ort 4 ort The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here Range is also simultaneously set 2 On Off When the alarm is turned on Type Value and Relay On Off are displayed 3 Type Set the alarm type For the alarm types see Explanation 6 5 suuely Pumas pue Huibpea mouyoy K 6 2 Alar
307. reen returns to the Save Load Clear Data menu e1eg BHuiziyeniuy pue saji4q Huibeuey el 9 5 Managing Files Displaying Free Space on the External Storage Medium Deleting all the files in the directory 1 Of the directories listed in the Directory name frame select the directory in which the files you wish to delete exist using the up and down arrow keys The File name frame displays a list of files in the selected directory is the root directory 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays a confirmation dialog box 3 Use the arrow keys to select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key to delete all the files in the directory All files are cleared from the file list To cancel the delete operation select No and press the DISP ENTER key Note __ If the ESC key is pressed in the middle of the operation the screen returns to the Save Load Clear Data menu Deleting a directory A directory can be deleted if there are no files in the directory To delete a directory that has files delete all the files in the directory first 1 Of the directories listed in the Directory name frame select the directory you wish to delete using the up and down arrow keys Check that no files are displayed in the File name frame is the root directory The root directory cannot be deleted 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays a confirmation dialog box 3 Use the arrow keys to select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key to
308. reerrerirernsrrnrinernnsns 13 5 Chapter 14 Specifications 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 IMPUE Specifications eegenen sA E AERE RETS E E SST 14 1 Display Specifications cee eeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseaeeeeeesnaeseeeeeeeesneeseneesea 14 3 Data Storage Specifications cccccccsccsesccssessateceates sscascvesnaccsecceaeeassanenseneasaitaaeesociaesaes 14 5 Alarm Function Specificato S eiiieaen ernia eiiiai 14 8 Specifications of Communication FUNCIONS z i reiiesisiissr oiiire 14 9 xi Contents Appendix Index 14 6 Specifications Of Optional FUNCOMS s cccccc cccatecscsecascaccaeuececcasvecnsersesstuandeastesnesesoenstnaceel 14 10 14 7 General Specifications 14 8 Dimentional Drawings Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings 0 cece cert ee eee ecetesceseeneeneeee App 1 Appendix 2 Data Formats Of ASCII File sc ccsts cc scisactevads casas scvecndes Hi ccnnevtneabsvasiven dha cdeaesaecuewechacaes App 7 xii Chapter 1 Overview of Functions 1 1 Overview of the RD MV100 Unlike conventional recorders that record data on charts the RD MV100 displays the measured data acquired in the internal memory to a LCD in the form of waveforms numerical values and bar graphs The measured data can also be saved to external storage media such as floppy disks Zip disks and ATA flash memory cards RD MV100 External media SUOIJOUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 Floppy disk
309. relay option number of outputs and the F1 option 3 Replace the terminal cover and fasten it with screws Note The option terminal block itself can be removed by loosening the two screws at the top left and bottom right of the terminal block This makes wiring work easier To prevent bad contacts make sure to securely tighten the screws after wiring x x J JE Loosen screw Loosen screw X J 0 0 Q Q r T 1 p109 4 oy Husn 210499 e 2 4 Alarm Output Wiring A1 to A3 Option Alarm terminal position Enclosed in parentheses are the relay numbers assigned to each option terminal Z X Bi X x x 3 Option terminal J x x 3 gt J 0 0 Q Q ST ST Xx F Terminal arrangement only the position of the alarm output terminals is indicated When the relay is not energized NC is closed and NO is open C is the common terminal A1 A1 F1 A2 A2 F1 A3 A3 R1 Contact Specifications Item
310. rence voltage The initial setting is set so that the reference junction compensation provided by the recorder is used For the setting procedure see section 5 9 Filter and Moving Average The filter and moving average are used to suppress the effects of noise that is riding on the signal Filtering is provided on the RD MV102 and RD MV104 Moving average is provided on the RD MV106 and RD MV112 The filter or moving average can be set on each channel For the setting procedure see section 5 8 Filter function RD MV102 and RD MV104 Suppresses the effects of noise above the frequency determined by the specified time constant The time constant can be set to 2 s 5s or 10s The filter is initially turned OFF Effects of using filter Output response fot a step input Input lt _ 2 5 10 s time constant the time it takes to reach 63 2 of the output value 1 3 1 2 Functions of the Input Section Moving average RD MV106 and RD MV112 The input signal of the measurement channel is set to the averaged value of the m most current data points the number of moving averaged data points acquired at the scan interval The number of moving averaged data points can be set in the range 2 to 16 The moving average is initially turned OFF The figure below shows an example indicating the operation of the buffer for the moving average computation when the number of moving averaged data points is set to
311. ressing the FUNC key displays the soft key menu The Math RESET soft key is displayed only when the computation is suspended 2 Pressing the Math RESET soft key clears the data from all computation channels Hath reset Clearing the Computation Dropout Display When a computation data dropout occurs during computation the computation icon displayed in the status display section turns yellow The computation icon will return to a white color once the computation data dropout has been acknowledged Computation icon Procedure 1 Pressing the FUNC key displays the soft key menu The Math ACK soft key is displayed only when a computation data dropout occurs 2 Pressing the Math ACK soft key causes the yellow computation icon in the status display section to return to a white color Explanation Computation data dropout occurs when the computation is not completed within the scan interval When this occurs frequently lower the CPU load by reducing the number of computation channels or making the scan interval longer uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog z 11 4 Setting Computation Channels This section describes the procedures to set equations to computation channels The equation is set in the setting mode Equations cannot be set while data acquisition or computation is in progress Procedure e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue
312. rm occurs when the measured value exceeds the alarm value Lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value falls below the alarm value 1 5 Alarm Function Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm alarm value Measured Alarm occurrence i computed data Alarm release 1 ia alarm value Alarm release Measured computed data Alarm occurrence Alarm delay upper limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value remains above the alarm value for the specified time period delay period e Alarm delay lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below the alarm value for the specified time period delay period Alarm delay upper limit alarm example T is the specified delay period Measured computed data 1 x X4 Alarm value Alarm occurrence Alarm release e Alarm does not occur at T1 because the time period is shorter than the specified delay period T e The input exceeds the alarm value at X2 but the alarm does not occur The alarm occurs at X3 at which the specified delay period elapses the time when the alarm occurs is the time at X3 e The input falls below the alarm value at X4 and the alarm is released Difference upper limit alarm An alarm occurs when the difference between the measured values of two channels becomes greater than or equal to the alarm value Can be specified only on difference computation channels Difference l
313. rmined from a day of data up to the specified time and written to the internal memory Weekly report At the specified time of the specified day every week the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from a week of data up to the specified time and written to the internal memory Monthly report At the specified time of the specified date every month the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from a month of data up to the specified time and written to the internal memory The number days in a month may be 28 29 30 or 31 days depending on the month Types of reports e Hourly only Creates reports every hour e Daily only Creates reports every day e Daily and weekly Creates daily and weekly reports e Daily and monthly Creates daily and monthly reports For the report data display see section 4 5 Combinations of reports that can be created The reports created by the RD MV100 can be set to hourly only daily only daily and weekly or daily and monthly Number of measurement and computation channels that can be assigned to the report Up to 12 channels can be assigned to one report The report data are not created for channels that are set to Skip or those that have the computation turned Off About the sum unit sum scale In the sum computation TLOG SUM of time series data are summed over the scan
314. rms AC or less Mounting position Can be inclined up to 30 deg backward Mounting at an angle away from the perpendicular is not acceptable Warm up time At least 30 minutes after power on Altitude 2000 m or less Ambient temperature With temperature variation of 10 C 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less for Volt and TC ranges Excluding the error of reference junction compensation 0 1 of rdg 2 digit or less for RTD ranges Power supply For 100 to 240 VAC power supply model With variation within 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 digit or less With variation of 2 Hz from rated power frequency at 100 VAC 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less For 12 VDC power supply model With variation within 10 to 18 VDC 1 digit or less Magnetic field AC 50 60 Hz and DC 400 A m fields 0 1 of rdg 10 digits or less suoneoiioeds 14 15 14 7 General Specifications Input source resistance Transport and Storage Conditions 1 Volt range With variation of 1 KQ Ranges of 2 V or less within 10 uV Ranges of 6 V or greater 0 1 of rdg or less 2 TC range With variation of 1 KQ Within 10 uV 100 uV when the burnout upscale downscale function is switched on 3 RTD range Pt100 With variation of 10 Q per wire resistance of all three wires must be equal 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less With maximum difference of 40 mohms between wires approximately 0 1 C The following speci
315. rn to the Save Load Initialize menu press the ESC key 2 Press the DISP ENTER key to load the file After loading the screen returns to the operation mode The loaded setup data take effect Note If the loaded data does not take effect refer to the error log For the procedure related to displaying the error log see section 10 5 9 2 Saving Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium Using Key Operation Procedure Explanation The following data in the internal storage memory are saved to the external storage medium using key operation Display data Event data Menual sampled data TLOG data option Report data option These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Press the soft key Next 1 3 Press 7 soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press 3 Save data soft key to save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium Note The data in the internal memory cannot be saved to the external storage medium while data acquisition or computation is in progress Name of the directory to which to save the data The name of the directory to which to save the data is the specified name AXX where XX is the sequence number Each time carrying out the key operation and the data are saved the sequence number of the directory name increments by one Example When the specified directory name is DATAO the first set of data
316. rol signal wires to the terminal The terminal arrangement for the remote control option is as follows Cis a common terminal for terminals 1 through 8 Terminal position Z N 23 E NN os x x Option terminal x J 0 0 ic Q A A m Terminal arrangement only the position of the remote control terminals is indicated REMOTE C denotes the common terminal 3 Replace the terminal cover and fasten it with screws Note The option terminal block itself can be removed by loosening the two screws at the top left and bottom right of the terminal block This makes wiring work easier To prevent bad contacts make sure to securely tighten the screws after wiring e Use shielded wires for the remote control wires to reduce the effects of noise Connect the shield to the earth ground terminal of the recorder Jep1099ey oy Husn a10jog e 2 6 Remote Control Wiring R1 Option Input Specifications Item Specification Input signal Voltage free dry contact open collector TTL or transistor Input conditions ON voltage Less than or equal to 0 5 V 30 mA DC Leakage current in the OFF state No more than 0 25 mA Signal duration 250 ms minimum Input type Photocoupler isolation one side common Internal isolated power source 5
317. s are as follows Group Name Group 1 GROUP 1 Group 2 GROUP 2 Group 3 GROUP 3 Group 4 GROUP 4 The initial value varies depending on the number of installed channels Group Number RD MV102 RD MV104 RD MV106 RD MV112 1 01 02 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 05 06 01 02 03 04 05 06 2 01 02 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 3 01 02 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 05 06 01 02 03 04 05 06 4 01 02 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 Aejdsig oy Bulyesado pue Huas 7 7 Setting the Trip Line Trend A line to indicate a particular value of interest trip line can be displayed on the trend display e The maximum number of trip lines that can be displayed in one group is four e The position of the trip line is specified as a percentage of the display span e You can specify the thickness of the trip lines See section 7 13 Procedure e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press mw Press the soft key Next 1 3 Press the soft key as To display the setting screen press the soft key ol Group number fr 1 Group set
318. s the START key to enter the trigger wait state After the trigger is activated data are acquired for the specified time data length see section8 11 and the operation is stopped Data are overwritten when the trigger is activated again Every time the trigger is activated during the trigger wait state data are overwritten Press the STOP key to terminate dtata acquisition Data acquisition AN Trigger wait Ke Trigger activated When the internal memory is divided into blocks An event data file each in the blocks is created Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state After the trigger is activated data are acquired for the specified time data length see section8 11 and the operation is stopped When the trigger is activated again data are acquired and stored to the next block When all blocks are full and the trigger is activated data are overwritten to the first block Every time the trigger is activated during the trigger wait state data are overwritten to the next block Press the STOP key to terminate data acquisition First block Second block Last block Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition MN MN 1 AMN Trigger wait i Trigger wait i Trigger wait T Trigger activated gt Trigger activated gt Trigger activated Note The event data in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary gt Se
319. sed in equations are measurement channels computation channels constants KO1 to K12 communication interface data C01 to C12 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 You can specify a computing equation that performs relational computation on a computing element Example 01 LT ABS 02 EXAMPLE 02 LT 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value in channel 2 is less than the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 GT 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value in channel 2 is greater than the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 EQ 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value in channel 2 is equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 NE 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value in channel 2 is not equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 GE 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value in channel 2 is greater than or equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be O 02 LE 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value in channel 2 is less than or equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be O Logical Computation The computation is performed using e1 and e2 which are identified as either zero or non zero
320. ser name verification Check the user name setting PASS Failed password verification Check the password setting ACCT Failed account verification Check the account setting TYPE Failed to change the transfer type Check that the server supports the binary transfer mode CWD Failed to change the directory Check the initial path setting PORT Failed to set the transfer connection Check that the security function is disabled PASV Failed to set the transfer connection Check that the server supports PASV commands SCAN Failed to read the transfer connection settings Check that proper response to the PASV command is received from the server 284 FTP transfer setting error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 284 Character String and Details MODE Internal processing error LOCAL Internal processing error REMOTE The destination file name is not correct Check that you have the authority to create or overwrite files ABORT File transfer abort was requested by the server Check the server for the reason for the abort request 12 4 12 1 A List of Messages Code Message 285 FTP data connection error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 285 Character String and Details SOCKET Failed to create a socket for the transfer connection BIND Failed the transfer connection command CONNECT
321. set or release the alarm This prevents the alarm from being set or released repetitively when the measured value is fluctuating around the alarm value The hysteresis is fixed to 0 5 of the display span display scale if the range is set to Scale The initial setting is ON Upper Limit Alarm H Alarm occurrence Alarm set point 1V Hysteresis approx 0 5 Alarm release Measured value Lower Limidt Alarm L Alarm release Measured value 1V Hysteresis approx 0 5 L Alarm set point Alarm occurrence Alarm output relay If you are using a model with the optional alarm output relay A1 through A3 a contact signal can be generated according to the alarm conditions For the procedure related to setting the alarm output relay see section 6 2 Alarm Setting The following functions can be specified on the alarm output relay For details see section 6 4 e When multiple alarms are set to one alarm output relay notify the succeeding alarms after the first alarm that causes the relay operation reflash alarm function e When multiple alarms are set to one alarm output relay operate the relay when all specified alarms are active AND function Energize or de energize the alarm output relay when the alarm occurs energize de energize function of the output relay When the alarm changes from the ON state to the OFF state return to normal condition turn OFF the
322. ss the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Actions that can be assigned None No action is assigned 10 11 10 7 Setting the Remote Control Functions Option R1 Basic Setting Mode Start Stop e Remote input Rising start falling stop Start Starts stops the acquisition of the display data and the event data the computation option and the report option Stop Stops the acquisition of the display data and the event data and the report option e Ifthe RD MV100 is started applying a rising signal produces no effect If the RD MV100 is stopped applying a falling signal produces no effect Trigger Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e This becomes the external trigger that starts the acquisition of the event data to the internal memory This is valid only when acquiring the event data to the internal memory using the trigger or rotate mode the acquisition start trigger is set to external trigger and the RD MV100 is in the trigger wait state see section 8 2 For all other cases applying the remote signal produces no effect Alarm ACK Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e Releases the alarm indication and relay output option This is the same function as when the Alarm ACK soft key is pressed Time adj e Remote input Trigger 250 ms
323. ssing the DISP ENTER key displays a confirmation window Pressing the DISP ENTER key initializes the settings and returns to the operation mode ejeg BHulziyeniuy pue saji4 Huibeuey el Chapter 10 Other Functions 10 1 Using Key Lock Procedure Key lock is a function used to prevent key operations Zip disk removal and saving data to the external storage medium in the manual save mode To release a key lock you must enter a password The key lock ON OFF condition is retained even if the power is turned OFF Thus the next time the power is turned ON the preexisting state is restored Key lock is set in the basic setting mode Enabling key lock This operation is carried out in the operation mode 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Keylock soft key The key lock function is enabled Note If a locked key is pressed when the key lock function is engaged a message This key is locked is displayed When manual save is specified even if the external storage medium is inserted into the drive and the front cover is closed the data cannot be saved to the external storage medium if the key lock function for the external storage medium is engaged e If the key lock function for the external storage medium is engaged when using a Zip disk the disk cannot be ejected even if the eject button is pressed A key lock icon appears in the status display section when the key lock is enabled Se
324. string that appears after error code 282 Character String and Details HOSTNAME Failed the DNS lookup search the IP address corresponding to the host name Check the DNS setting and the destination host name TCPIP Internal processing error UNREACH Failed to connect to a control connection server Check the address setting and that the server is running OOBINLINE Internal processing error NAME Internal processing error CTRL The control connection does not exist Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period TAC Failed to respond in the TELNET sequence Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period ECHO Failed to transmit data on the control connection Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period REPLY Failed to receive data on the control connection Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period SERVER The server is not in a condition to provide the service Check that the server is in a condition in which service can be provided 12 3 Bunooyseqnos D 12 1 A List of Messages Code Message 283 FTP command was not accepted Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 283 Character String and Details USER Failed u
325. switch time 7 Save Load Clear data 7 1 Save settings Save setup data to the external storage medium 9 1 7 2 Load settings Load setup data from the external storage medium 9 1 7 3 Save data Store measured data using key operation 9 2 7 4 Load display data Load Display the diaplay data on the external storage medium 9 3 7 5 Load event data Load Display the event data on the external storage medium 9 4 7 6 File list List the files on the external storage medium 9 5 7 7 Delete Delete files on the external storage medium 9 5 7 8 Format Format the external storage medium 9 5 7 9 Clear data Clear the measure computed data in the internal memory 9 7 8 Time set 3 7 Date time 9 Math range 11 4 Computing equations display span and unit for computation channels Math alarm 11 5 Alarm type for the computation channel Alarm value for the computation channel Output relay On Off for the computation channel Output relay number for the computation channel 10 Constant 11 6 Constants K01 to K12 3 16 3 5 Configuring the Functions Soft key Settings in the Setting Mode Title Item 11 Tag 7 1 Tag names of the computation channels TLOG 11 8 Timer number used in TLOG sum unit Rolling average 11 10 Turn ON OFF the rolling average Sampling interval and the number of samples for the rolling average Alarm delay time 6 3 The Menu Screen and Items of the Basic Setting
326. t please contact Omega Replace the fuse every two years for preventive maintenance For 12 VDC Power Supply Model AN e For safety reasons make sure to turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the recorder from the main power supply before replacing the fuse e To prevent the possibility of fire use only the specified fuse purchased from Omega e Never short circuit the fuse holder to bypass the use of a fuse Follow the procedures below to replace the fuse of the 12 VDC power supply model For fuse rating see section 13 4 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts Follow the procedures below to replace the fuse 1 Turn OFF the power switch 2 Disconnect the recorder from the main power supply 3 While pressing the fuse carrier located to the right of the power switch turn it counter clockwise approximately 45 degrees The carrier and the fuse will slide out 4 Replace with a new fuse insert the carrier in the fuse holder and turn it clockwise while pressing the carrier to fix it in place For 100 120 VAC 200 240 VAC Power Supply Model A e Don t replace the fuse by yourself Never take RD MV100 part to replace a fuse Fuse ratings Rated voltage 250 V Rated current 1A Type Time lag Approved standard IEC VDE 13 2 13 3 Calibration To maintain the measurement accuracy we recommend the recorder be calibrated once a year Calibration service is also provided by Omega
327. t valid only when the operation of the alarm display or output relay is set to hold gt Section 6 4 Time adj Trigger Adjust the internal clock to the nearest hour Computation Edge Start stop computation only for models with the computation option M1 Computation reset Trigger Reset the computed value of the computation channel reset to 0 only on models with the computation option M1 while the computation is stopped Manual sample Trigger Write the instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory once Load setup data1to3 Trigger Load and activate the setup data file that had been created and stored in the external storage medium Messages 1 to 8 Trigger Display messages 1 to 8 on the trend display and write them to the internal memory Remote signal edge and trigger The above operations are carried out on the rising or falling edge of the remote signal edge or the ON signal lasting at least 250 ms trigger Rising Falling Trigger Rising Falling gt 250 ms or more For contact inputs the remote signal rises when the contact switches from open to close and falls when the contact switches from close to open For open collector signals the remote signal rises when the collector signal voltage level of the remote terminal goes from high to low and falls when the collector signal goes low to high 1 27 1 8 Other Functions Daylight Savings Time Temperature Unit
328. t for four channels DAILY REPORT START TIME 2000 01 31 20 00 Model Serial No XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX File Header AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA CH TAG CHO1 CHO2 CHO3 CHO4 i UNIT VOM 2000 01 01 00 00 o Cc Cc C AVE 0 00 0 10 0 20 0 30 MAX 0 00 1 00 2 00 3 00 MIN 0 00 1 00 2 00 3 00 SUM 0 000000E 01 1 000000E 04 2 000000E 04 3 000000E 04 Status e Various events that occur while creating the report data are saved as status data and output in the report The positions of the various statuses in the report are fixed E Error an error is detected O Over an over range computation overflow is detected P Power failure a power disruption has occurred C Change the time has been changed Data size e Size of the header section The following equation can be used to derive the size of the header section Title carriage return line feed serial number carriage return line feed file header carriage return line feed channel tag 8 19 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed unit 6 9 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed The size of the title varies depending on the report type as follows For hourly reports HOURLY 45 bytes e For daily reports DAILY 44 bytes e For weekly reports WEEKLY 45 bytes
329. ta during Manual Save Note e The following character combinations can not be used as directory names AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK All spaces or spaces at the top or in the middle of character strings are also not allowed for directory names 3 Save data Displayed when Manual Save is selected Select Unsave or All The initial setting is All e Unsave Saves only the data that have not been saved when the medium is inserted into the drive All Save all the data residing in the memory when the medium is inserted into the drive Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key wnp n abe10 sg jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eead 8 21 8 10 Setting the Channels to Display the Trend and Acquire the Data Basic Setting Mode Procedure Explanation Select the channels for which the trend is to be displayed The measured and computed data of these channels can be acquired The waveforms for the channels that are turned OFF are not displayed but numerical values bar graphs and alarms are displayed These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter e The possible selections are displayed at the
330. ted to the manual save and auto save see section 8 4 Trigger When the internal memory is not divided into blocks One event data file is created in the internal memory Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state After the trigger is activated data are acquired for the specified time data length see section8 11 and the operation is stopped At this point the acquisition does not start even if the trigger is activated Data acquisition MN Trigger wait Trigger activated Stop When the internal memory is divided into blocks An event data file is created in each block Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state After the trigger is activated data are acquired for the specified time data length see section8 11 and the operation is stopped When the trigger is activated again data are acquired and stored to the next block When all blocks are full no more acquisition takes place First block Second block Last block Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition ZN i uN f N Trigger wait Trigger wait Trigger wait Trigger activated Trigger activated i 5S gt Trigger activated Stop 8 4 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data Mode Description Rotate When the internal memory is not divided into blocks One event data file is created in the internal memory Pres
331. th STOP soft key Disabled Math reset soft key Disabled Write memory Message soft key Disabled Manual sample soft key Disabled Trigger soft key Disabled e Save Display soft key Disabled Save Event soft key Disabled Media External storage medium Prevent Zip disk removal 1 Set together by Math parameter 2 Set together by Write memory parameter suonouny 19440 2 10 3 10 3 Using the Key Login Logout Function This function allows only certain users to access the recorder The users are distinguished by their user IDs and passwords You can select whether or not to use User IDs In addition you can set whether or not to allow operations in the basic setting mode for each user When logged out only the login operation can be accessed Enabling Disabling the key login logout and using not using the user ID are set in the basic setting mode See the next section When logged in the user name is displayed in the status display section See section 4 2 The records of key login logout can be viewed on the log screen See section 10 7 Note When the power is turned OFF and turned ON again the recorder starts in the logged out condition Logging in 1 Press the FUNC key Soft keys and a list of user names are displayed 2 Select the user using the soft key User name list Enter setup Userl userl Enable User2 User3 Userd User5 Userb User
332. that channel are substituted with data from the previous scan Do not use more than 16 stacks channel KO1 to K12 C01 to C12 D01 to D08 in one equation Otherwise a computation error may occur The computed result is set to positive overflow displayed as xxxxxx in this case Example The number of stacks in the equation 01 K01x 03 04xK0O2 is five uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog 11 3 Using the Computation Function Operations related to the computation function are as follows Start stop computation This operation can be carried out with the START STOP key or the FUNC key The computation can also be started or stopped via remote control or communication commands e Reset computation data This operation can be carried out with the FUNC key The computation data can also be reset via remote control or communication commands e Release the computation data dropout display This operation is carried out with the FUNC key The computation data dropout display can also be released via communication commands For the remote control function see section 10 7 For the communication function see MV100 Communication Interface User s Manual Start Stop Computation Operation using the START STOP key Starting the computation also starts the data acquisition to the internal memory 1 Press the START key to start the computation At this point the data acquisition to the internal memory is also started When the co
333. the DISP ENTER key 10 22 Chapter 11 Computation Report Function Option 11 1 Overview of the Computation Function Equations can be written to computation channels by using the measured data of measurement channels or computed data from computation channels as variables The result of the computation can be displayed or stored Computation is performed every scan interval In addition a moving average rolling average can be calculated on the computed result of a computation channel and the moving average value can be used as the computed data for that channel For report functions see sections 11 11 to 11 13 Computation Function Computation channels Model Channels RD MV102 Channel 31 to 34 RD MV104 Channel 31 to 34 RD MV106 Channel 31 to 42 RD MV112 Channel 31 to 42 4 channels 4 channels 12 channels 12 channels Types of Computations The following computations can be performed In the table below y represents the computed result X and n generally represent the measured data of a measurement channel and a constant For details see Data that can be used in equations Type Description Four arithmetical operations Addition subtraction multiplication x and division xx Determines the power y X SQR Determines the square root ABS Determines the absolute value LOG Determines the common logarithm y logiox EXP Determines the exponent y
334. the RD MV100 Manual Name Manual No Description RD MV100 User s Manual M3641 This manual Explains all functions and procedures of the RD MV100 excluding the communication functions RD MV100 Communication M3643 Explains the communication functions of Interface User s Manual the Ethernet serial interface RD MV100 M3645 Describes the functions and operating DAQstandard Software procedures of RD MV Software that comes with the package The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functions Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact Omega Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without Omega s permission is strictly prohibited Windows is registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation Zip is a trademark or registered trademark of lomega Corporation Company and product names that are used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders First edition March 2000 Safety Precautions This instrument conforms to IEC safety class provided with terminal for protective grounding Installation Category Il and EN61326 1 EMC standard
335. the center of the upper section of the cover and pulling forward Push the eject button to remove the storage medium 3 Close the front cover If the RD MV100 is turned ON the external storage medium icon in the status display section disappears see the figure of the icon on the previous page Floppy disk Zip disk ATA flash memory card Note If the key lock function for the storage medium is engaged the Zip disk cannot be ejected even if the eject button is pressed Release the key lock before attempting to eject the Zip disk Procedure when the Zip disk cannot be ejected If the Zip disk cannot be removed by performing the steps given in the Removing the storage medium section carry out the following steps to remove it 1 Open the front cover by pressing down on the knob that is located in the center of the upper section of the cover and pulling forward 2 Insert a pin of approx 1 mm in diameter into the eject button hole and press slowly This will cause the Zip disk to be ejected Eject button of the Zip drive Zip disk eject hole Formatting external storage media Format the external storage medium before use The external storage medium is formatted to the following types using the recorder Format type Floppy disk 2 HD 1 44 MB Zip disk FDISK 1 partition hard disk format ATA flash memory card FDISK 1 partition hard disk format External storage media formatted on other devices can be used as lo
336. the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw To display the setting screen press the soft key Oo l 1 First CH fat Last cH far Range Hode Type Range Span L Span_U Ref CH ance T 2 000 2 008 a1 2 3 ae 4 5 6 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure A First channel and last channel Set the channels that will measure the difference 2 Mode Set the mode to Delta 3 Type Select the input type from Volt TC RTD and DI 4 Range If the type is Volt enter the input range If it is TC or RTD enter the type of TC or RTD If it is DI enter Level or Cont 5 Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Note For TC or RTD input the display span cannot exceed the difference between the maximum and the minimum of the input range Example For TC type L the input ran
337. the upper and lower limits are 0 0 to 0 0 Rule 3 If the integer section of either value at the end of the scale is greater than or equal to two digits and less than three digits the value is displayed with the decimal fraction is discarded Example 3 If the scale is set to 0 1 to 100 0 the scale display for the upper and lower limits is 0 to 100 Rule 4 If the integer section of either value at the end of the scale is greater than or equal to four digits a three digit mantissa and exponent are displayed x10 or x102 for example Example 4 If the scale is set to 10 to 2000 the scale display for the upper and lower limits are 0 to 200 x 10 Rule 5 If the difference in the number of digits between the upper and lower limits of the scale is larger than the number of digits that can be displayed the smaller value is set to zero 0 or 0 0 Example 5 If the scale is set to 0 0005 to 0 5000 the upper and lower limits of the scale are displayed as 0 0 to 0 5 Unit The unit is displayed near the center of the scale When the partial expansion display is used the position will be shifted When the trend is displayed horizontally the number of characters that can be displayed is up to 4 The unit is not displayed if the resolution of the measuring range is less than the number of scale divisions using small marks 7 18 7 10 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend During
338. ting Mode Pni 1 to Pnl 3 load e Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more The setup data of the file LOAD 1 PNL LOAD 2 PNL or LOAD 3 PNL that is saved in the external storage medium are loaded for use The file LOAD 1 PNL LOAD 2 PNL or LOAD 3 PNL must be created and saved to the external storage medium beforehand Message 1 to message 8 e Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e Displays a message at the position corresponding to the time when the signal was applied on the trend display The displayed message is also written to the internal memory When the data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped messages cannot be displayed or written Applying a remote signal produces no effect Remote input signal The above operations are carried out on the rising or falling edge of the remote signal edge or the ON signal lasting at least 250 ms trigger Rising Falling Trigger Rising Falling gt 250 ms or more For contact inputs the remote signal rises when the contact switches from open to closed and falls when the contact switches from closed to open For open collector signals the remote signal rises when the collector signal voltage level of the remote terminal goes from high to low and falls when the collector signal goes low to high suonouny 19410 2 10 13 10 8 Setting the Displayed Language Basic Setting Mode Procedure Explanation Select the
339. tion 8 2 Full is displayed when data acquisition to all blocks is complete When Full is displayed event data are no longer acquired even if the trigger condition is met In this case save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium e Block display When the event data storage area is divided into multiple blocks the usage condition of the blocks are displayed White block No data Green block Block containing data that were acquired to the internal memory after starting the current acquisition of event data Gray block Block containing data that were acquired before the current start operation 7 The external storage medium condition No display No storage medium inserted D and E displayed in order Accessing the storage medium E Storage medium is idle no access F The used space of the storage medium is indicated by the green level indicator in the icon The colored section indicating the level turns red when the amount of free space on the storage medium falls below 10 8 Computation icon option Computation icon not displayed No computation option or computation is suspended White computation icon Computation in progress Yellow computation icon Computation data dropout occurred Note Computation data dropout occurs when the computation is not completed within the scan interval The computation icon returns to the green icon by pressing FUNC MathACK soft key see section 11 3
340. to acquire only the event data to the internal memory Event data e When configured to acquire the display data and the event data to the internal memory Data selected in the memory summary To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Selecting the type of file display data or event data to display in the memory summary This operation is carried out on the Memory Summary screen 1 Select display data or event data using the left and right arrow keys The selected file type is indicated by a green circle to the left of DISPLAY DATA or EVENT DATA Information about the selected file is displayed 4 14 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Opening the display data file from memory summary recalling the historical trend This operation is carried out when displaying the information about the display data in Memory Summary 1 Select the file using the up and down arrow keys i sT att We 01 10 38 Jan 09 01 14 02 163 SaPlins Selected file 69 01 05 04 Jan 09 01 08 20 H Stor Janes iE Jan 09 00 38 40 923 Stoe Jan 8 23 26 08 Jan 09 00 25 02 1768 Stoe Jan 23 23 38 Jan 08 23 23 7 Stor RELAY O D0000D cao i Jan 09 61 63 20 SAPE DATA DISPLAY DATA Start Tire End Time Data Factor 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen menu 3 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left
341. to measurement and computation channels Measurement error or computation error E For measurement channels Plus over range O Minus over range O Over range occurs when the input type is voltage and the input exceeds 5 of the measurable range For example consider the case when the measurement range is 2 V and the measurable range is from 2 000 to 2 000 V If the input signal exceeds 2 200 V over range occurs If the input signal falls below 2 200 V over range occurs Over range occurs when the input type is TC thermocouple or RTD resistance temperature detector and the input exceeds approximately 10 C of the measurable range For example consider the case when the measurement range is R and the measurable range is from 0 0 to 1760 0 C If the input signal exceeds approximately 1770 0 C over range occurs If the input signal falls below approximately 10 0 C over range occurs For computation channels computation overflow when the value exceeds 3 4E 38 O computation overflow when the value falls below 3 4E 38 O Numerical display The range of displayed values of report data is from 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point The decimal point position corresponds to the position of the decimal point of the upper and lower limit span of the computation channel However special displays are used for cases given in the table below e Measurement channel
342. to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w Twice press the softkey Next 1 3 To display the setting screen press the soft key Oo 1 First CH Last CH Br Hath 0n 2 Calculation expression pi E 3 Span_Lower Span_Upper Unit 2080 00 268 88 5 4 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 2 Math On Off If On is selected a box used to enter the equation will appear When not using computation select Off 3 Calculation expression Enter the equation up to 40 characters Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter an equation Enter the equation using the following key operations and press the DISP ENTER key For writing equations see Rules for writing an equation common items in section 1 2 Maximum of 48 character can be entered ABS LOG EXP lt EQ NESH SGT AETA ASEN NLE AND NOT XOR OR TLOG AVEC MAX MING SUHE P P 11 10 11 4 Setting Computation Channels Left and right arrow key Select the input position Up and down arrow key Select th
343. ual replacement periods for your recorder The replacement of the LCD the battery and the rubber strips must be conducted by a qualified Omega personnel Contact Omega to have the LCD replaced Item Replacement Part Name Part Number Specifications Quantity Used Period Fuse 2 years FUSE A1352EF 250 V 4 A time lag 1 for 12 VDC power supply for P1 model LCD 5 years Back light module 1 Battery 10 years Lithium battery 1 Rubber 5 years Dust and water proof for front panel 1 each strip rubber strip for front cover Floppy 5 years 1 disk drive ZIP 5 years 1 drive Note The recommended replacement period for the back light module is the period when the brightness falls to half The speed of degradation of the brightness varies depending on the operating conditions and the judgement is subjective These factors should be considered when determining the actual replacement period soUueUD UIe 2 13 5 Chapter 14 Specifications 14 1 Input Specifications Number of Inputs Scan Interval Inputs Input Type RD MV102 two channels RD MV104 four channels RD MV106 six channels RD MV112 twelve channels RD MV102 MV104 125 ms or 250 ms RD MV106 RD MV112 1sor2s 2s when an A D integration time is set to 100 ms Volt DC voltage TC thermocouple RTD resistance temperature detector DI digital input DC current with external shunt resistor attached Measur
344. udes measurement channels that are skipped and computation channels that are turned OFF TLOG data only on models with the optional computation function M1 The average maximum minimum sum or maximum minimum can be computed for the specified channels at predetermined intervals and the result can be acquired to the internal memory You can specify the interval Report data only on models with the optional computation function M1 The average maximum minimum and sum can be computed for the specified channels at predetermined intervals and the result can be acquired to the internal memory You can select one hour hourly report one day daily report one day one week daily and weekly reports or one day one month daily and monthly reports for the interval Saving Data to the External Storage Media External storage media Various data can be stored to the following storage media e 3 5 floppy disk 1 44 MB 2HD e Zip disk 100 MB ATA flash memory card 4 MB to 160 MB The size varies depending on the memory card that you are using Save method There are two methods of storing data to the external storage medium One method stores the data when press MEDIA key referred to as manual save The other method stores data automatically at certain time intervals to a storage medium referred to as auto save Other types of data that can be stored In addition to the types of data described in Acquiring Data to th
345. uration The recorder has a 5 5 TFT color LCD 320 by 240 dot resolution The screen consists of the status display section and the data display section SUOIJOUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 Ma n 116 I Status display section 0 675 163 56 y Data display section 2 4 example of a digital display 0 677 0 677 y Y HEH E H Status display section Displays the displayed screen name date and time internal memory external storage medium usage condition alarm condition key lock user name key login function and computation condition option For details see section 4 2 Data display section e Displays the operation screen such as the trend display digital display and bar graph display of the measured and computed data as well as alarm message and file information Displays the setup screen for the setting and basic setting modes when the recorder is being configured For details related to the setting and basic setting modes see section 3 5 Group display The data displayed on the trend digital and bar graph displays are the data of measurement or computation channels that are assigned to the group Up to 6 channels can be assigned to a single group For the procedure used to assign channels to groups see section 7 6 Setting Groups Up to four groups can be registered The groups are common to the trend digital and bar graph displays On the trend digital and bar graph displays th
346. urement range of the difference computation channel and the reference channel is not the same the difference computation is performed according to the following rules e When the decimal position between the reference channel and the difference computation channel is different the measured value of the reference channel is adjusted to the decimal position of the measured value of the difference computation channel to make the computation Example When the measured value of the difference computation channel is 10 00 and the measured value of the reference channel is 100 0 the computation result becomes 10 00 100 0 90 00 When the units for the reference channel and the difference computation channel are different the measured value is not adjusted Example When the measured value of the difference computation channel is 10 00 V and the measured value of the reference channel is 5 00 mV the computation result becomes 10 00 V 5 00 mV 5 00 V e When the reference channel is set to Scale or Sqrt the computation uses the scaled values 5 8 5 5 Scaling Setting Procedure For DC voltage thermocouple RTD and ON OFF input the measured values can be scaled to a value in the appropriate unit and displayed Set the upper and lower limits of the input s display span the upper and lower limits after scaling and the unit The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress Th
347. urns out the measured result is set to negative over range xXxxxx 5 RJC Set External or Internal External Use the external RJC Internal Use the RJC of the recorder 6 Volt uV If External is selected set the reference junction compensation voltage to add to the input Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the voltage Enter a value 20000 uV to 20000 LV initial value is O uV and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key The integration time of the input A D converter The recorder uses an A D converter to convert the input signal to a digital signal The A D converter operates at an integral time of 16 7 ms 60 Hz 20 ms 50 Hz or 100 ms By setting the integration time to match the frequency of the power supply being used power supply frequency noise can be minimized Burnout of thermocouple input When the alarm is set to detect positive or negative over range the occurrence of burnout of thermocouple can be displayed as an alarm Turn the burnout function OFF when connecting the input wires in parallel with other devices Reference junction compensation of th
348. user CAUTION Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent minor or moderate injury or damage to the instrument Note Provides important information for the proper operation of the instrument Notation regarding procedures On pages that describe the operating procedures in Chapter 3 through 11 the following symbols are used to distinguish the procedures from their explanations ie eeeerrerreee Represents contents that are displayed on the screen Example Volt Se T Indicates a reference item Example 1 3 Display Function to 12 Denotes the soft key that is used to make a selection on the setting and basic setting menus Follow the steps indicated with numbers The procedures are given with the premise that the user is carrying out the steps for the first time Explanation This section describes the setting parameters and the liitations regarding the procedures It does not give a detailed explanation of the function For detail on the function see chapter 1 viii Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Foreword eeeee Safety Precautions Checking the Contents of the Package scsic ccicccssccscessecctssstaccessevecncsieasenerventeecntaevervstesesesvarcesenteciedees iv Howto Use thistMamall siisii tenesantvdstaet tatueecsetssevedeinieissetetsvedeteiaasceteateeserss vii Overview of Functions led Overview Of ThE MVI OO iseseisana aari
349. ver special displays are used for cases given in the table below Data Condition Computation Display The computed result exceeds 99999999 plus over XKKKKKKK The computed result is below 9999999 minus over XXXXXXX The value exceeds 3 4E 38 or is below overflow XXKKXXXX OF KXKKKKK 3 4E 38 in the middle of computation An error is detected error KKKKKKK When the following computation is specified a computation error occurs e X 0 SQR X LOG X When a skipped channel No is entered in the equation The number of stacks see section 11 2 stack over XKKKKXKKK in the equation exceeds 17 The moving average of the computed result of the equation specified for the computation channel is determined and the result is displayed as computed data for that channel The sampling interval and the number of samples can be specified for each channel The maximum sampling interval is 1 hour the maximum number of samples is 64 The initial setting is OFF do not perform moving average For the setting procedure see section 11 10 You can set up to 4 alarms on each computation channel The alarm types are upper limit alarm H lower limit alarm L delay upper limit alarm T and delay lower limit alarm t The hysteresis is fixed to 0 For the procedures to set the alarms see section 11 5 For the alarm indication see section 4 2 and 6 1 Acquiring the Computed Data Display data
350. verviews CURSOR ON 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays or clears the cursor To close the menu without displaying clearing the cursor press the ESC key Switching to the trend or bar graph screen of the channel selected with the cursor 1 Move the cursor to select the channel using the arrow key 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 3 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 4 Select JUMP TO TREND or JUMP TO BAR using up and down arrow keys TE overview TE OVERVIEW JUMP TO TREND 32 5 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without displaying the screen press the ESC key JUMP TO BAR 4 4 Using the Overview Screen Explanation Overview screen Channel Tag Cursor Alarm type Measured computed value 4 12 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Operation Flow Diagram Screen rmenu Sub menu INFORMATION Screen menu Sub menu A A A gt el gt z y I i To HISTORICAL Information TREND selection MEMORY SUMMARY as gt z gt To Report data When displaying Report data CJ Screen menu Sub menu DISP ENTER key 4V lt gt Arrow keys Procedure
351. written into the event data file a character string that is common to all data files Alarm and message is held Data format Binary format Manual sampled data Every time a key that executes manual sampling is pressed measured computed data instantaneous values of all channels at that point are acquired Up to 50 samples of data can be stored in the internal memory The header string can be written into the manual sampled data file a character string that is common to all data files Data format ASCII format TLOG data option e TLOG data are statistical computation data Data are added to the internal memory at the end of every interval period Up to 400 data sets can be stored in the internal memory The header string can be written into the TLOG data file a character string that is common to all data files Data format Binary format Report data option Consists of hourly daily weekly and monthly reports Data are computed at intervals depending on the report type one hour for hourly report one day for daily report etc Data are added to the internal memory at the end of every interval period Up to 40 reports can be stored in the internal memory Each report file can contain up to 12 measured computed channels of report data The header string can be written into the report data file a character string that is common to all data files Data format ASCII format 8 1 w
352. x Fir a Frin Vmax Vmin When the value inside the square root is negative when Fmin lt Fmax Fx negative overflow xx xxx when Fmin gt Fmax Fx positive overflow xxxxx 5 12 5 7 Skip Setting Procedure These channels will not be measured or displayed The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w To display the setting screen press the soft key Ooa l 1 First CH fal Last cH far Range Node 2 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 2 Mode Set the mode to Skip Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 5 13 sBuinjes jauueyo jusweinseayy 7 5 8 Input Filter and Moving Average Setting Pr
353. xample Display data only Measurement channel 2 computation channel none Data Maximum Number of Data Points and Sampling Length Display data Maximum number of data points 1 200 000 2 CH x 4 bytes 0 x 8bytes 150 000 However since 100 000 data points is the limit Maximum number of data points 100 000 Display rate When set to 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Sampling length 100 000 data points x 60 s 6 000 000 s approx 69 days Measurement channel 12 computation channel 6 Data Maximum Number of Data Points and Sampling Length Display data Maximum number of data points 1 200 000 12 CH x 4 bytes 6 x 8 bytes 12 500 Display rate When set to 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Sampling length 12 500 data points x 60 s 750 000 s approx 8 days Event data only Measurement channel 2 computation channel None Data Maximum Number of Data Points and Sampling Length Display data Maximum number of data points 1 200 000 2 CH x 2 bytes 0 x 4 bytes 300 000 However since 120 000 data points is the limit Maximum number of data points 120 000 When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length 120 000 data points x 1 s 120 000 s approx 33 hours Measurement channel 12 computation channel 6 Data Maximum Number of Data Points and Sampling Length Event data Maximum number of data points 1 200 000 12 CH x 2
354. y Data Procedure This operation is performed when the type of data acquired is set to Display or E D For setting the data acquisition method see sections 8 10 and 8 11 Start data acquisition To begin data acquisition press the START key The icon in the status display section will change accordingly Stop data acquisition 1 Press the STOP key A confirmation window opens A Do you want to stop data storage ves Coa On models with the computation option the confirmation window displays the following choices Mem Math terminate acquisition and all computations Memory terminate acquisition and Cancel Application name AP Supervisor name SUPERVISOR Manager name MANAGER Batch name No SAMPLE 884 Comment 1 2 3 i Do you want to stop data storage 2 Select Yes Mem Math or Memory for models with the computation function using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key to stop the data acquisition The icon in the status display section changes to a stop icon Nfa ee ee e One file is created for one set of start and stop operations The maximum number of files that can be stored in the internal memory is 16 When the memory area becomes full or the number of files exceeds 16 existing data will be overwritten starting with the oldest data When a power disruption occurs the file is closed When the power resumes data are written to anew file
355. y data storage area in the internal memory becomes full or the number of files exceeds 16 The number of display data files is equivalent to the number of times the data acquisition is started stopped or the number of files that are segmented by the auto save interval during auto save For details related to the manual save and auto save see section 8 4 Note The display data in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary Section 4 5 When a power disruption occurs the file is closed 8 3 winipa abe10 sg jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy ea e 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data Event data This operation is performed when the type of data acquired is set to event data only or display data and event data There are three modes in data acquisition Free Trigger and Rotate Free mode can be set when acquiring the event data only Mode Description Free Data acquisition is started by pressing the START key The operation is stopped by pressing the STOP key When the storage area of the internal memory becomes full or the number of files in the internal memory exceeds 16 it is overwritten The number of display data files The number of event data files is equivalent to the number of times the data acquisition is started stopped or the number of files that are segmented by the data length see section 8 11 during auto save For details rela
356. y login logout log 807 887 Time 1 0 No User Name Jan 61 2088 8 59 34 In al user1 Jan 01 2000 88 59 29 Out Jan 01 2000 88 52 51 In al user1 Jan 81 2688 88 21 45 In al user1 Jan 81 2888 88 15 17 In a user1 Jan 81 2088 88 14 45 Out Jan 81 2008 88 14 35 In G1 user User name User No Date time Login logout Communication command log For detail see RD MV100 Communication Interface User s Manual 887 887 Time ID User Name 1 0 Hessage Link D Jan 06 2000 18 52 23 1 user lt Logout Jan 86 2000 18 52 23 1 user gt cca Jan 06 2008 18 51 48 1 user lt 258 y Message Jan 06 2000 18 51 48 1 user gt FD 8 881 818 Jan 06 2008 18 51 41 1 user lt EB Jan 06 2808 18 51 41 1 user gt BOB Jan 06 2888 18 51 37 1 user lt Login 1 0 symbol gt input lt output Name of the user that accessed this instrument A number used to identify the user that is connected Date and time when the access occurred FTP log For detail see RD MV100 Communication Interface User s Manual 885 885 Time No Code lag File Name F Jan 01 2000 01 50 22 282 HOSTNAME S 10101580 DDS Jan 01 2000 81 50 22 282 UNREACH P 18181580 DDS P P P Jan 81 2088 81 49 32 10101498 DDS f Jan 81 2008 81 48 51 10101480 DDs _ _ File name Jan 81 2008 01 48 27 DX_FTPC TXT FTP server P primary S secondary Error code Date and time when the file transfer w
357. y saved to the external storage medium as a single file at each auto save interval e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press To display the setting screen press the soft key 8 Time div imin Auto save interval 1 1 Auto save interval Displayed when auto save is selected See section 8 8 Select from the choices shown on the soft keys Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 8 18 8 8 Setting the Auto Save Interval for the Display Data Explanation Choices for the auto save interval The maximum auto save interval varies depending on the display update rate sampling interval is determined from the display update rate the data type display data only display data and event data and the number of measurement and computation channels to be stored see section 8 10 The available choices for the auto save interval are displayed on the soft key Se

RD-MV100 Series Recorder User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents